Toshiba Cell Phone 705T User Manual

Introduction  
Thank you for purchasing the Vodafone 705T handset.  
• To ensure proper usage, read this manual thoroughly before using the 705T handset.  
• After reading this manual, retain it for future reference.  
• If this manual is lost or damaged, contact Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
• Accessible services may be limited because of contract conditions.  
The 705T handset is compatible with the 3G/UMTS and GSM systems.  
Caution  
• Unauthorised copying of any part of this manual is prohibited.  
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.  
• Not all functions and services described in this user guide are available in Japan.  
• Steps have been taken to ensure the accuracy of descriptions in this manual. If you find inaccurate or missing information, contact  
Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
• Manuals with missing pages or incorrect collating will be replaced.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Introduction ...........................................1  
What's in the Box...................................2  
Contents................................................3  
About this Manual..................................5  
Keys & Notations....................................6  
Safety Precautions .................................7  
General Notes......................................19  
Trademarks and Patents.......................25  
3
Video Call ........................................105  
About Video Calls ...............................106  
Making a Video Call............................107  
Answering a Video Call .......................108  
Convenient Functions for Video Calls ...109  
Video Call Settings .............................113  
Camera/Video Camera....................116  
Camera .............................................117  
Pictures.............................................121  
Videos...............................................132  
Picture & Video Settings .....................136  
Messaging.......................................145  
Messaging Capabilities.......................146  
MMS.................................................148  
SMS..................................................159  
MMS/SMS Common Operations..........164  
Vodafone live! .................................171  
Accessing Vodafone live! ....................172  
Bookmarks ........................................174  
Operations for Web Pages ..................176  
Browser Settings................................179  
V-appli...............................................180  
Vodafone live! CAST........................186  
Vodafone live! CAST ...........................187  
Subscribing/Cancelling Subscription....188  
Checking Content Updates..................189  
Downloading Content Manually ...........190  
Checking History................................191  
Data Folder......................................192  
Data Folder........................................193  
Using Files & Folders..........................195  
Displaying Files on a TV......................198  
Using vObjects...................................200  
Using a Memory Card.........................202  
Using the USIM Card ..........................204  
9
Settings ...........................................208  
Mode Settings....................................209  
Display Settings .................................217  
Phone Settings...................................225  
Call Settings ......................................230  
Security Settings ................................240  
Memory Settings................................249  
Network Settings................................250  
Location Settings ...............................253  
Shortcut Menu ...................................254  
10 Convenient Functions .....................255  
Calendar............................................256  
Alarms...............................................260  
Dictionary ..........................................262  
Calculator..........................................263  
Converter...........................................264  
Voice Recorder...................................265  
Countdown Timer...............................267  
Notepad.............................................268  
Number Memo...................................269  
World Clock .......................................270  
Backup..............................................271  
Multi Task..........................................273  
Barcode.............................................274  
Flashlight...........................................277  
Sending Touch Tones..........................278  
4
5
6
1
Basic Operations...............................30  
Parts & Functions.................................31  
USIM Card ...........................................39  
Battery Pack ........................................42  
Memory Cards .....................................44  
Turning Handset Power On/Off..............45  
System Mode Setting ...........................46  
Language Setting.................................49  
Date & Time Settings............................50  
Main Menu ..........................................53  
Codes..................................................54  
Making a Call.......................................55  
Answering a Call ..................................56  
Engaged Call Operations.......................57  
Call Log...............................................59  
Optional Services .................................63  
Text Entry ............................................72  
Phonebook ..........................................78  
7
8
2
Media Player .....................................95  
Media Player Menu ..............................96  
Playback Window.................................97  
Playing Music & Videos.........................98  
Using Playlists....................................100  
Other Operations & Settings................102  
Music Player......................................103  
11 File Transfer ....................................280  
Bluetooth™.......................................281  
USB Cable .........................................288  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Appendix .........................................294  
Default Settings .................................295  
Troubleshooting..................................302  
Storage Capacity................................304  
Main Specifications ............................305  
Glossary ............................................306  
Index.................................................308  
Warranty & After Sales Service............313  
Customer Service...............................315  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Manual  
,EVEL ꢋ HEADING  
4 . 4  
3CREENSHOT  
"CPVUꢀ4.4  
,EVEL ꢀ HEADING  
£
Ó
\
Î
ä
5IFꢀ4IPSUꢀ.FTTBHFꢀ4FSWJDFꢀ 4.4ꢁꢀBMMPXTꢀZPVꢀUPꢀFYDIBOHFꢀUFYUꢀNFTTBHFꢀXJUIꢀPUIFSꢀ  
IBOETFUTꢂꢀ'PSꢀEFUBJMTꢀPOꢀ4.4ꢃꢀDPOUBDUꢀ7PEBGPOFꢀ(FOFSBMꢀ*OGPSNBUJPOꢀ QBHFꢀꢄꢅꢆꢁꢂ  
/i  
Ý
Ì
%XPLANATION OF FUNCTION  
 
ä
£
n
É
£
È
ä
i


œ
]
œ
Ü
Ê
>
À
i
Ê
Þ
œ
Õ
$SFBUJOHꢀꢄꢀ4FOEJOHꢀBOꢀ4.4ꢀ.FTTBHF  
ꢁꢅꢀ *OꢀTUBOECZꢀNPEFꢃꢀQSFTTꢀ  
ꢁꢃꢀTFMFDUꢀ$SFBUFꢀ.FTTBHFꢀBOEꢀQSFTTꢀ ꢀ 4FMFDUꢁꢂ  
ꢆꢅꢀ 4FMFDUꢀ4.4ꢀBOEꢀQSFTTꢀ ꢀ 4FMFDUꢁꢂ  
«
"
Ì
ˆ
œ
˜
Ã

i
>
À
%XPLANATION OF STEP  
.OTE  
5IFꢀ$SFBUFꢀ.FTTBHFꢀXJOEPXꢀBQQFBSTꢂ  
$SFBUFꢀ4.4ꢀ.FTTBHFꢀ8JOEPX  
ꢇꢅꢀ &OUFSꢀBꢀNFTTBHFꢀBOEꢀQSFTTꢀ  
0ROVIDES IMPORTANT  
INFORMATION ABOUT A  
PROCEDUREꢌ  
:PVꢀDBOꢀFOUFSꢀVQꢀUPꢀꢅꢇꢈꢀDIBSBDUFSTꢂ  
0ROVIDES IMPORTANT OR  
SUPPLEMENTARY  
INFORMATION ON THE STEPꢌ  
/PUF  
ꢈꢅꢀ 4FMFDUꢀ'SPNꢀ$POUBDUTꢀPSꢀ&OUFSꢀ3FDJQJFOUꢀBOEꢀQSFTTꢀ ꢀ 4FMFDUꢁꢂ  
*GꢀZPVꢀQSFTTꢀ ꢀ $BODFMꢁꢀXIJMFꢀ  
/ꢂ  
BOꢀ4.4ꢀNFTTBHFꢀXJUIꢀNVMUJQMFꢀ  
BEESFTTFTꢀTFUꢀJTꢀCFJOHꢀTFOUꢃꢀUIFꢀ  
TFOEꢀPQFSBUJPOꢀJTꢀDBODFMMFEꢀGPSꢀ  
UIFꢀBEESFTTꢀTFUꢀBGUFSꢀUIFꢀBEESFTTꢀ  
UPꢀXIJDIꢀUIFꢀNFTTBHFꢀJTꢀDVSSFOUMZꢀ  
CFJOHꢀTFOUꢂꢀ  
Xꢀ'SPNꢀ$POUBDUTꢉꢀ4FMFDUꢀBꢀQIPOFꢀOVNCFSꢀGSPNꢀUIFꢀ$POUBDUTꢀMJTUꢀ QBHFꢀꢉꢇꢁꢂ  
Xꢀ&OUFSꢀ3FDJQJFOUꢉꢀ&OUFSꢀBꢀQIPOFꢀOVNCFSꢀVTJOHꢀUIFꢀLFZQBEꢂꢀ:PVꢀDBOꢀFOUFSꢀVQꢀUPꢀ  
ꢊꢈꢀEJHJUTꢂ  
4IP  
ꢂꢅꢀ 4FUꢀBꢀQIPOFꢀOVNCFSꢀBOEꢀQSFTTꢀ  
5IFꢀ3FDJQJFOUꢀMJTUꢀBQQFBSTꢂ  
0ROVIDES ADVICE AND  
POINTS TO REMEMBER ABOUT  
A PROCEDUREꢌ  
ꢊꢅꢀ 4FMFDUꢀ4FOEꢀ4.4ꢀBOEꢀQSFTTꢀ  
5JQ  
5IFꢀNFTTBHFꢀJTꢀTFOUꢀBOEꢀUIFOꢀTBWFEꢀUPꢀ4FOUꢀ.FTTBHFTꢂ  
"OZꢀNFTTBHFꢀUIBUꢀDPVMEꢀOPUꢀCFꢀ  
TFOUꢀJTꢀTBWFEꢀUPꢀ6OTFOUꢀ.FTTBHFTꢀ  
QBHFꢀꢅꢋꢈꢁꢂ  
.FTTBHJOHꢀ  
ꢁꢂꢃ  
0AGE NUMBER  
)NDEX  
2EFERENCE PAGE  
About Screenshots  
The screenshots appearing in this manual may differ from the actual menus appearing on the handset.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keys & Notations  
Soft Keys  
Navigation Key  
The following notations are used to indicate Navigation Key  
operations.  
Press soft keys to perform operations indicated at the bottom of the  
main display.  
• Press to access Options menu.  
J
Notation/  
Function  
Operation  
• Press to return to the previous  
K
window.  
/PTIONS  
"ACK  
A
Accesses Shortcut menu, increases volume,  
moves cursor up, etc.  
Press up  
B
Press down  
Accesses Contacts list, decreases volume,  
moves cursor down, etc.  
D
Press left  
Accesses Dialled Numbers, decreases  
volume, moves cursor left, etc.  
C
Press right  
Accesses Received Calls, increases volume,  
moves cursor right, etc.  
Accesses Main menu, confirms selected  
item, performs selected operation, acts as the  
camera shutter-release, etc.  
@
Press centre  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
• To ensure proper usage, be sure to read the Safety Precautions  
thoroughly before using your handset. Always keep this manual  
available for future reference.  
1 Serious injury includes loss of sight, wounds, high temperature  
burns, low temperature burns (burns causing reddish areas,  
blistering and other damage to the skin as a result of heat  
exceeding the body temperature contacting your skin for a  
prolonged time), electric shock, fractures and poisoning requiring  
hospitalization or long-term medical treatment.  
• Be sure to follow the safety information contained in the  
instruction manuals and indicated on the product to prevent injury  
to the user and other persons, as well as damage to property.  
2 Injury includes wounds, burns and electric shock not requiring  
hospitalization or long-term medical treatment.  
• When a child uses the handset, it is recommended that a parent  
or guardian reads the instruction manuals thoroughly and provides  
proper instructions to the child.  
3 Damage to property includes extensive damage to homes and  
household property, as well as livestock and pets.  
• The following describes the meaning of safety symbols and signal  
words. Be sure to understand their meanings before proceeding to  
read this manual.  
Symbol Descriptions  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Pictograph Descriptions  
indicates a prohibited action. The prohibited  
action is indicated graphically or described in  
text in or near the symbol.  
Pictograph  
Meaning  
Indicates an imminently hazardous operation  
Danger that could result in death or serious injury1 of the  
indicates a compulsory action that must be  
carried out. The compulsory action is indicated  
graphically or described in text in or near the  
symbol.  
user.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous operation that  
Warning could result in death or serious injury1 of the  
user.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous operation that  
Caution could result in minor or moderate injury2 to the  
user or damage to property3.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limitation of Liability  
Danger  
Vodafone and Toshiba accept no liability whatsoever for any  
damages arising from natural disasters such as earthquakes,  
lightning, storms and floods, as well as fires through no fault  
of Vodafone and Toshiba, acts by third parties, other accidents,  
improper use by the user, whether intentionally or negligently, or  
use under other abnormal conditions.  
Do not disassemble, modify or repair the handset,  
battery pack, charger or Stereo Handsfree Headset  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire, electric  
shock, injury or malfunction. Modification of the handset is  
prohibited by Japanese Radio Law. For repair, contact your  
nearest Vodafone Shop or Vodafone Customer Assistance  
(page 315).  
Vodafone and Toshiba accept no liability whatsoever for  
incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the  
product, including, but not limited to, corruption or loss of data,  
lost business revenue or suspension of business operations.  
Vodafone and Toshiba accept no liability whatsoever for any  
damages arising from improper use not conforming to the  
instructions in the instruction manuals.  
Vodafone and Toshiba accept no liability whatsoever for any  
damages arising from malfunctions caused by use in  
combination with connection equipment or software that is not  
authorized for use by Vodafone and Toshiba.  
Do not dispose of the handset, battery pack, charger  
or Stereo Handsfree Headset in a fire or expose it to  
heat  
If the handset or battery pack is exposed to water,  
do not dry it artificially in heating equipment  
(microwave oven, etc.)  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire or  
malfunction.  
Image data recorded with the camera, downloaded data and  
other data may be corrupted or lost due to malfunction, repair  
or other improper handling of the product. Vodafone and Toshiba  
accept no liability whatsoever for the restoration of corrupted or  
lost data, as well as any damages or lost revenue and profits.  
Vodafone and Toshiba accept no liability whatsoever for  
corruption or loss of stored data resulting from failures or  
malfunctions of the product, regardless of the cause. Be sure to  
keep a separate memo of important data to limit damage caused  
by data corruption or loss to a minimum.  
Do not charge, use or leave the handset, battery  
pack, charger or Stereo Handsfree Headset in hot  
places such as near a fire or heater  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire or  
malfunction.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Danger  
Do not expose the handset, charger, battery pack or  
Do not touch the battery pack connectors (metal  
parts) with any metal objects (necklace, hairpin,  
etc.)  
Stereo Handsfree Headset to fluids such as water,  
perspiration or seawater  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire, electric  
shock or malfunction. If the handset is dropped accidentally  
in water or any other fluid, immediately turn off the handset  
and contact your nearest Vodafone Shop or Vodafone  
Customer Assistance (page 315).  
Doing so may cause the battery pack to overheat, rupture  
or catch fire, as well as the metal object to overheat.  
Do not use a battery pack other than one supplied  
with or designated for the handset  
Do not use the battery pack for any other handset  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire or  
malfunction.  
Do not leave the handset, charger, battery pack or  
Stereo Handsfree Headset outdoors, in a bathroom  
or wherever water or any other fluid is used  
Do not place the handset, charger or battery pack  
near cups, vases or other containers of fluids  
Exposure to water or other fluids may cause electric shock,  
overheating, rupturing or fire.  
Do not use a charger other than one supplied with or  
designated for the handset to charge the battery pack  
Do not use the charger for any other handset  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire or  
malfunction.  
Do not use excessive force when inserting the  
battery pack into the handset or connecting the  
handset to the charger  
Do not connect any cords with reverse polarity  
Doing so may cause the battery pack to leak, rupture,  
overheat or catch fire, as well as cause electric shock or  
malfunction.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning  
Do not charge the battery pack while it is wet or  
damp  
Turn off the handset while you are near any  
precision electronic equipment  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire, electric  
shock or short circuit. If the battery pack is exposed to  
fluids such as water, unplug the rapid charger immediately.  
Radio waves may adversely affect the operation of  
electronic equipment. Examples of such equipment:  
medical electronic equipment such as cardiac pacemakers  
and hearing aids or fire alarms and automatic doors. If  
you use medical electronic equipment, consult with the  
equipment manufacturer or distributor about the influence  
of radio waves.  
Do not use the handset while driving  
Do not make or receive a call and do not use other  
functions (messaging, game, camera, video, music,  
mobile light, etc.)  
Remove the power plug from the outlet if the rapid  
charger is not to be used for a long period of time or  
before cleaning  
Failing to do so may cause an electric shock, fire or  
malfunction.  
Doing so may cause a traffic accident. Use of the handset  
while driving is prohibited by law. Before using the handset,  
stop the vehicle in a safe area where parking is permitted.  
Do not use the phone wherever there is the risk of a  
fire or explosion such as in a petrol station  
Doing so may ignite the gases and start a fire or explosion.  
Turn off the handset and do not charge it wherever gases  
may be present (petrol station, etc.).  
Turn off the handset wherever its use is prohibited  
such as on an aircraft  
Cancel schedule and alarm settings before turning  
handset power off  
Use of the handset on an aircraft is prohibited by law.  
Do not swing the handset by its strap, a video output  
cable or the Stereo Handsfree Headset  
Doing so may cause an injury, accident or damage.  
Check your surroundings to confirm that it is safe  
to make/receive calls, send/receive messages, take  
pictures or record videos  
Failing to do so may cause you to trip over or cause a  
traffic accident.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning  
Do not use the handset with any power voltage other  
than the specified voltage  
If electrolyte fluid leaking from the battery pack  
gets into your eyes, wash your eyes immediately  
with clean water and have your eyes treated by an  
ophthalmologist  
Doing so may cause a fire. The power voltages are 100  
to 240 V AC for the rapid charger and 12 or 24 V DC (for  
a negative ground car only) for a cigarette lighter charger.  
Failing to receive treatment for your eyes may result in eye  
injury.  
Wipe away any dust on the plug of the rapid charger  
with a dry cloth after removing the plug from the  
outlet  
When thunder is heard outside, stop using the  
handset immediately  
Dust on the plug or outlet may cause a fire.  
Turn off the handset and do not touch it  
Failing to do so may attract lightning and cause electric  
shock. When thunder is heard, stop using the handset and  
move to a safe place such as inside a building.  
Follow the instructions below when installing and  
wiring in-vehicle devices  
Make sure that devices do not interfere with  
driving and safety equipment such as airbags  
Make sure that wires are not caught in seatbelt  
buckles, doors or other moving parts  
Any wire caught around a foot, brake pedal, accelerator  
pedal, etc. may interfere with driving and cause a traffic  
accident. If any part of an in-vehicle device drops onto the  
floor, it may startle you into abrupt braking or steering,  
leading to a traffic accident.  
If the battery pack fails to charge in the specified  
time, stop charging immediately  
Failing to do so may cause overheating, rupturing or fire.  
Contact your nearest Vodafone Shop or Vodafone Customer  
Assistance (page 315).  
When inserting the rapid charger plug into an AC  
household outlet, make sure that a metal strap or  
any other metal object does not touch the plug  
Failing to do so may cause electric shock, short circuit or  
fire.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning  
If something unusual happens to the handset,  
If the handset is used near an implanted cardiac  
pacemaker, defibrillator or other electronic medical  
equipment, radio waves may interfere with such a  
device or equipment  
battery pack or charger; for example, it emits smoke  
or an unusual odour or is damaged, perform the  
following steps immediately  
1. If the battery pack is charging, unplug the rapid charger  
from the AC household outlet or unplug the cigarette  
lighter charger from the cigarette lighter socket.  
2. Make sure that the handset is not hot, then turn it off  
and remove the battery pack.  
Failing to do so and continuing use (charging) may cause  
the battery pack to overheat, rupture or catch fire or the  
handset to overheat. If something unusual happens,  
contact your nearest Vodafone Shop or Vodafone Customer  
Assistance (page 315).  
Observe the following guidelines  
1. If you have an implanted cardiac pacemaker or  
defibrillator, carry and use the handset at a distance of  
at least 22 centimetres away from the implanted device.  
2. Turn off the handset in crowded places such as packed  
trains because a person with an implanted cardiac  
pacemaker or defibrillator may be nearby. Radio waves  
can interfere with the operation of a cardiac pacemaker  
or other medical device.  
3. Follow the precautions below in medical institutions.  
Do not bring the handset into an operating room,  
intensive care unit or coronary care unit.  
Turn off the handset in a hospital ward.  
Turn off the handset in a lobby or other location close  
to medical equipment.  
Do not drop the handset or battery pack or subject it  
to excessive shock  
Doing so may cause overheating, rupturing, fire or  
malfunction.  
Observe the instructions of individual medical  
institutions and do not use the handset in or bring it  
into prohibited areas.  
Turn off the handset after cancelling any settings  
such as schedule and alarm settings that turn on the  
handset automatically.  
Do not sit down with the handset in your trousers  
pocket  
Excess weight may damage the display, battery pack or  
other parts resulting in overheating, fire or injury.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning  
4. When using electronic medical devices other than an  
implanted cardiac pacemaker or defibrillator outside  
of medical institutions (such as at home), consult with  
the individual medical device manufacturer about the  
possible influence of radio waves.  
The above information conforms to "The Guidelines on  
Use of Mobile Phones and Other Devices to Prevent  
Electromagnetic Wave Interference with Electronic Medical  
Equipment" (Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference  
Japan, April 1997), as well as refers to "The Investigative  
Research Report on the Influence of Electromagnetic  
Waves on Medical Equipment" (Association of Radio  
Industries and Businesses, March 2001).  
Do not use the rapid charger with any power supply  
other than a 100 to 240 V AC household power  
supply  
Doing so may result in a fire, as well as cause the charger  
to overheat, catch fire or malfunction.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Do not use or leave the handset or battery pack in  
Do not pull, bend with excessive force or twist the  
cords of the rapid charger and cigarette lighter  
charger  
places where it will be exposed to direct sunlight or  
in hot places such as inside a car in the sun  
Doing so may cause overheating, fire or malfunction.  
Do not damage or modify them  
Do not place objects on them  
Keep the handset, battery pack, macro lens and  
charger away from infants and small children  
Failing to do so may result in the battery pack, macro lens  
or memory card being accidentally swallowed or cause an  
injury.  
Do not apply heat and keep them away from heaters  
Damage to a cord may cause electric shock, overheating  
or fire.  
Do not plug or unplug the rapid charger with wet  
hands  
Make sure that the charger terminals (metal parts)  
do not come into contact with wires or other metal  
objects  
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction.  
Keep magnetic cards away from the handset and  
macro lens and make sure that a magnetic card is  
not trapped when closing the handset  
Failing to do so may cause the magnetic data on a cash  
card, credit card, telephone card or floppy disk to be lost.  
Failing to do so may cause overheating or burns.  
Do not pull the cord when unplugging the rapid  
charger or cigarette lighter charger from an AC  
household outlet or socket  
Damage to the cord may cause electric shock, overheating  
or fire.  
Do not use the handset in a vehicle if it affects in-  
vehicle electronic devices  
Hold the plug when unplugging the rapid charger or  
cigarette lighter charger.  
Use of the handset in some types of vehicles may, in  
some rare cases, affect in-vehicle electronic devices and  
interfere with safe driving.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Do not place the handset on an unstable or unlevel  
surface  
If the fuse for the cigarette lighter charger blows,  
replace it with a designated fuse  
Doing so may result in the handset falling and causing  
injury or malfunction. Be particularly careful when vibration  
is set.  
Replacing the fuse with other than a designated fuse may  
cause overheating and fire.  
For details on replacing the fuse, refer to the instruction  
manual of the cigarette lighter charger.  
Do not dispose of the used battery pack with  
ordinary garbage  
If fluid leaking from the battery pack comes  
into contact with skin or clothing, wash it away  
immediately with clean water  
Insulate the connectors with tape and then dispose of the  
used battery pack separately from ordinary garbage or take  
it to your nearest Vodafone Shop. Be sure to observe local  
regulations on the separate collection of used batteries,  
wherever applicable.  
Failing to do so may cause skin irritation.  
Do not touch the handset with sweaty hands or  
place it into a pocket of sweaty clothes  
Sweat and humidity may erode the internal components of  
the handset and cause overheating or malfunction.  
Do not use the cigarette lighter charger when the  
car engine is not running  
Doing so may result in a flat battery.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
If your skin becomes irritated, immediately stop  
Part  
Material (Surface Treatment)  
using the handset and consult with a dermatologist  
The following materials and surface treatments have  
been used for the handset. Some of these materials may  
cause itching, irritation, eczema, etc. in some rare cases  
depending on the individual's constitution and physical  
condition.  
Earphone microphone jack cap,  
memory card slot cap  
Polyester elastomer resin (urethane  
coating)  
Polyester elastomer resin (urethane  
coating)  
Cable connector cap  
Screws  
Steel (nickel coating, copper  
undercoat)  
Part  
Material (Surface Treatment)  
Stainless steel (acrylic baking  
coating)  
Outer housing (keypad, main display  
side, external display side, battery  
compartment, camera section  
(screw cover))  
Speaker hole mesh  
PC resin (UV cured acrylic coating)  
Stereo Handsfree Headset  
Camera panel  
TPE/ABS resin  
Tempered glass  
PC resin/Silicone rubber (UV cured  
coating)  
PC resin/Sintered neodymium alloy  
(epoxy resin coating)  
Front key section  
Macro lens  
Main display panel, external display  
panel  
Hinge side cap  
PC resin  
Tempered glass (polyester film)  
Keypad  
PC resin  
Keys other than keypad  
PC resin (UV cured acrylic coating)  
Polyester elastomer resin (urethane  
coating)  
Earpiece  
External light LED lamp, charging  
LED lamp  
Acrylic resin  
Flash panel  
Logo badge  
Acrylic resin  
UV cured acrylic resin  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Before using the handset, make sure that no metal  
Make sure things like paper, cloth and bedding are  
not placed on the handset during charging using a  
USB connection, AC adapter, etc.  
objects (such as pins) are stuck to the earpiece  
Failing to do so may result in a metal object causing an ear  
injury, etc.  
Failing to do so may cause overheating, fire, burns or  
malfunction.  
If you have a weak heart, be careful with the call  
vibration and ringtone volume settings  
Failing to do so may startle you and may be harmful to your  
heart.  
Do not turn the volume up too high while using the  
Stereo Handsfree Headset  
Do not use Stereo Handsfree Headset continuously  
for long periods of time  
Be careful not to trap your fingers or objects when  
closing the handset and not to trap your fingers in  
the hinge when opening the handset  
Failing to do so may cause injury or damage to the LCD  
display.  
Exposure to high sound levels may impair hearing and  
prolonged use may cause hearing defect regardless of the  
volume level. Sound leakage may annoy other people and  
surrounding sounds may not be heard clearly resulting in  
an accident.  
Do not use the mobile light and flashlight for  
purposes other than taking pictures, recording  
videos or lighting  
Doing so may dazzle the eyes and cause impaired vision or  
other injury.  
Do not insert objects other than the memory card  
into the memory card slot  
Doing so may cause overheating, electric shock or  
malfunction.  
Cover the slot with the cap at times other than when you  
are inserting or removing the memory card.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Keep your face away from the memory card slot  
when inserting or removing the memory card  
Do not use the mobile light close to eyes  
Doing so may cause eye damage. Be especially careful not  
to take pictures or record videos with the mobile light too  
close to the eyes of infants.  
Keep a memory card out of the reach of small children  
If the memory card is let go of suddenly, it may fly out and  
hit your face resulting in injury.  
Do not use excessive force when inserting or  
removing the USIM card  
Doing so may cause a malfunction. Be careful not to injure  
a hand or finger when removing the card.  
Do not subject the memory card to vibration or  
shock or remove it from the slot or turn off the  
handset while data is being written to or read from  
the memory card  
Use only a USIM card designated for the handset  
Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.  
Failing to do so may cause data loss or malfunction.  
Use only the memory card supported by the handset  
Failing to do so may cause data loss or malfunction.  
The handset supports memory cards with a storage  
capacity of up to 1GB (as of March 2006).  
Do not remove the polyester film from the external  
display  
Using the handset without the polyester film to protect  
against shattering of the reinforced glass may result in an  
injury if the external display is damaged.  
Do not let children use cables such as a video output  
cable or the Stereo Handsfree Headset unsupervised  
and keep cables out of infant's reach  
An injury may be caused if, for instance, the cable is  
wrapped around a neck.  
Do not look through the macro lens at the sun or  
other objects emitting a strong light  
Doing so may damage your eyesight due to the light-  
collecting property of the macro lens.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Notes  
Using Your Handset  
Vodafone and Toshiba accept no liability whatsoever for the  
corruption or loss of stored data. Be sure to keep a separate  
memo of important data to limit damage caused by data  
corruption or loss to a minimum.  
• Be sure to charge the battery pack before using the handset for  
the first time or if the handset has not been used for a long time.  
When the battery pack is stored for a long time, it discharges over  
time even if it is not used.  
• Before using a memory card, read the instruction manual of the  
memory card thoroughly to ensure safe and proper operation.  
• When the handset is used for extended periods of time, especially  
in high temperature conditions, the handset surface could become  
hot. Please use caution when touching the handset under such  
conditions.  
• When certain items are taken out of the country, documentation  
may be required to certify that the export of the items is  
not controlled, prohibited, or restricted by the Export Trade  
Control Order and Foreign Exchange Order. Basically, no such  
documentation is required if you take the handset out of the  
country and bring it back for the purpose of personal use when  
going on vacations or short business trips. In some cases,  
however, an export permit may be required if the handset is to be  
used by or transferred to anyone else.  
• The handset employs radio waves. Signals may be disrupted  
even within service areas if you are indoors, underground, inside  
a tunnel or inside a vehicle. If you move to a location with poor  
signal reception, a call may be suddenly cut off.  
• When using the handset in public places, take care not to annoy  
other people around you. Use of the handset is prohibited in some  
public places such as in theatres or on buses and trains.  
• The handset is a radio transceiver under Japanese Radio Law. You  
may be requested to submit the handset for inspection based on  
this law.  
• Use of the handset near a landline phone, TV or radio may affect  
the image and sound quality of the equipment.  
• The handset employs a digital system to maintain a high level of  
communication quality even at very low signal levels. However,  
calls may be suddenly cut off when the signal strength becomes  
too weak.  
• The digital system provides a high level of privacy protection.  
However, the possibility of someone eavesdropping on your  
conversation cannot be ruled out as long as radio waves are used.  
• Data stored on the handset may be corrupted or lost on the  
following occasions.  
The handset is used improperly.  
Furthermore, a US government export permit may be required  
when taking the handset to countries for which the US government  
has imposed export restrictions (Cuba, Libya, North Korea, Iran,  
Sudan, Syria).  
The handset is exposed to static electricity or electric noise.  
The handset is turned off during operation.  
The battery pack is completely discharged.  
The handset malfunctions or is sent for repairs.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For details on export laws, regulations and procedures, refer to  
the Web page of the Security Export Control Policy Division of the  
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.  
Handling Basics  
• Do not use the handset in extreme temperatures, direct sunlight  
and humid or dusty places.  
• If you have hearing aids, use of the handset may interfere with  
some operations of the hearing aids. If there is any interference,  
consult with the manufacturer or distributor of the hearing aids.  
• Do not drop the handset or subject it to excessive shock.  
• To clean the handset, wipe it with a dry soft cloth. Do not use  
alcohol, thinner, benzene or other solvents. Doing so may cause  
discoloration and remove the printed logo.  
Inside Vehicles  
• Do not use the handset while driving. Use of the handset while  
driving is prohibited by law.  
• To clean the macro lens, wipe it with a dry soft cloth. Do not use  
alcohol, thinner, benzene or other solvents. Doing so may cause  
discoloration.  
• Before using the handset, stop the vehicle in a safe area where  
parking or stopping is permitted.  
• Avoid exposing the handset to rain, snow or high humidity. The  
handset, battery pack, charger, Stereo Handsfree Headset and  
other optional accessories are not waterproof.  
• Do not remove the battery pack while handset power is on to  
avoid malfunction.  
Aboard Aircraft  
• Do not use the handset on an aircraft. Turn off the handset after  
cancelling any settings such as schedule and alarm settings that  
turn on the handset automatically. Do not turn the handset back  
on while you are on the aircraft. Use of the handset on an aircraft  
is prohibited by law.  
• If the battery pack has been removed from the handset or the  
handset has not been charged for a long time, stored data and  
settings may be lost or altered. Vodafone and Toshiba accept no  
liability whatsoever for any damage or loss resulting from such  
negligence.  
• The battery pack is a consumable item employing lithium ions.  
Replace the battery pack with a new one if the operation time  
becomes extremely short after it is fully charged. Buy a new  
battery pack designated for the handset.  
• When disposing of a used battery pack after battery  
pack replacement or discontinued use of the handset,  
insulate the connectors with tape or place the battery  
pack into a plastic bag and then take it to your nearest  
Vodafone Shop or battery pack recycling cooperative store.  
Electromagnetic Waves  
• For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that  
contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of  
15 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure  
compliance with RF exposure guidelines.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Be sure to observe local regulations on the separate collection of  
used batteries, wherever applicable.  
• The handset's open/close status is detected by a magnetic sensor.  
Therefore, take care not to place the macro lens or other magnetic  
objects close to the microphone (mouthpiece) to prevent a  
malfunction.  
• When you replace the handset or send it for repair, messages and  
other data stored in the handset cannot be transferred to another  
handset.  
• Do not drop the USIM card or subject it to excessive shock. Doing  
so may cause a malfunction.  
• Do not bend the USIM card or place a heavy object on it. Doing so  
may cause a malfunction.  
• Do not allow the USIM card to get wet or leave it in places of high  
humidity. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
• Do not use or leave the USIM card in hot places such as near a  
fire or heater. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
• Avoid storing the USIM card in direct sunlight or hot and humid  
places. Failing to do so may cause a malfunction.  
• Some handset display pixels may be missing or remain lit. This  
is not a defect or malfunction. If the display is left on for a long  
period of time, pictures may be permanently burned into it.  
• Make sure the Stereo Handsfree Headset is securely plugged into  
the earphone microphone jack. Failing to do so may generate  
noise on the other party's phone during calls.  
• Do not turn the volume up too high while using the Stereo  
Handsfree Headset. Exposure to high sound levels may impair  
hearing and prolonged use may cause hearing damage regardless  
of the volume level. Sound leakage may annoy other people and  
surrounding sounds may not be heard clearly when walking,  
resulting in an accident.  
• When earphone microphone jack and external connector are not  
in use, make sure to replace the caps. Otherwise dust or water  
may enter the handset causing handset malfunction.  
• Hold the plug and do not pull the cord when unplugging the Stereo • Keep the USIM card out of infants' reach. Failing to do so may  
Handsfree Headset or a video output cable. Pulling the cord may  
cause damage or malfunction.  
result in the USIM card being accidentally swallowed or cause an  
injury.  
• Do not close the handset with the strap, macro lens, USB cable,  
Stereo Handsfree Headset or a video output cable inside. Doing so  
may cause malfunction or damage.  
• Before using the USIM card, read the instruction manual of the  
USIM card thoroughly to ensure safe and proper operation.  
• The antenna of the handset is built into the body and does not  
protrude. Signal sensitivity may be reduced if you touch or cover  
the portion of the body containing the internal antenna (pages 31,  
32). In particular, do not affix things like stickers onto this portion  
of the body.  
Mobile Camera  
• Be sure to observe proper etiquette when using the camera.  
• Do not expose the camera lens to direct sunlight. Concentrated  
sunlight through the lens may cause the handset to malfunction.  
• Be sure to try taking and previewing pictures before using the  
camera on important occasions like wedding ceremonies.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Do not commercially use or transfer pictures taken with  
the camera without the permission of the copyright holder  
(photographer), except for personal use.  
• Do not use the camera in locations where taking photos and  
recording videos are prohibited.  
Right of Portrait  
• Portrait right is the right of an individual to refuse to be  
photographed by others and protects from the unauthorized  
publication or use of an individual's photograph by others. Right  
of personality is a portrait right applicable to all citizens and  
right of publicity is a portrait right (property right) designed to  
protect celebrities' interests. Be careful when taking pictures with  
the handset camera. Photographing, publicizing and distributing  
photographs of citizens and celebrities without permission are  
illegal.  
Mobile Light & External Light  
• Do not use the mobile light in hot, cold or humid places. Doing so  
may shorten its life.  
• The mobile light and external light have a limited life. Repeated  
use will decrease the light intensity.  
Copyrights  
• Copyrighted materials, such as music, images, computer programs  
and databases, and their respective holders are protected by  
copyright laws. Duplication of copyrighted materials is permitted  
only for individual or home use. Making copies (including data  
conversion), modifications, transfers or network distributions  
of copies for purposes other than stated above without proper  
authorization constitutes an infringement of copyrights and moral  
rights, potentially resulting in claims for reparations or criminal  
punishment. If you use the handset to make copies, observe the  
copyright laws. Furthermore, recording materials using the camera  
is also subject to the same laws.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
create derivative works based on the Software.  
TOSHIBA CORPORATION  
2. Copyright. The Software is licensed, not sold. You acknowledge  
that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is or will  
be transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and  
full ownership rights to the Software will remain the exclusive  
property of Toshiba, Toshiba's affiliates, and/or their suppliers,  
and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except as  
expressly set out in this EULA. You may keep a back-up copy  
of the Software only so far as necessary for its lawful use.  
All copies of the Software must contain the same proprietary  
notices as contained in or on the Software and are subject to  
the terms of this EULA. All rights not expressly granted under  
this EULA are reserved to Toshiba, Toshiba's affiliates and/or  
their suppliers.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: PLEASE READ BEFORE USING YOUR  
HANDSET  
BY ATTEMPTING TO USE ANY SOFTWARE ON THE SUPPLIED  
HANDSET THIS CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE  
EULA TERMS. IF YOU REJECT OR DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL THE  
TERMS OF THIS EULA, PLEASE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ACCESS  
OR USE THE SUPPLIED SOFTWARE.  
End User License Agreement  
This End User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement  
between you (as the user) and TOSHIBA CORPORATION ("Toshiba")  
with regard to the copyrighted software as installed in a Toshiba 3G  
handset supplied to you (the "Handset").  
3. Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if  
you are a business organisation, you will use your best efforts  
to prevent your employees, servants and contractors from  
attempting to reverse engineer, decompile, modify, translate  
or disassemble the Software in whole or in part except to the  
extent that such actions cannot be excluded by mandatory  
applicable law and only if those actions are taken in accordance  
with such applicable law. Any failure to comply with the above  
or any other terms and conditions contained herein will result  
in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of  
the rights granted hereunder to Toshiba.  
Use or disposal of any software installed in the Handset and related  
documentations (the "Software") will constitute your acceptance of  
these terms, unless separate terms are provided by the Software  
supplier on the Handset, in which case certain additional or different  
terms may apply. If you do not agree with the terms of this EULA, do  
not use or dispose the Software.  
1. License Grant. Toshiba grants to you a personal, non-  
transferable and non-exclusive right to use the Software as  
set out in this EULA. Modifying, adapting, translating, renting,  
copying, making available, transferring or assigning all or part  
of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other  
persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks  
from the Software is strictly prohibited, except as expressly  
permitted in this EULA. Furthermore, you hereby agree not to  
4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. The Software is provided  
"AS IS" without warranty of any kind. TOSHIBA, TOSHIBA'S  
AFFILIATES, AND THEIR SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS OR OTHER TERMS (WHETHER  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND TERMS OF  
ADDRESSES, PHONE NUMBERS, PICTURES, RINGTONES ETC,  
BEFORE SUBMITTING YOUR PRODUCT FOR A WARRANTY  
SERVICE, AS SUCH DATA MAY BE DELETED OR ERASED AS  
PART OF THE REPAIR OR SERVICE PROCESS.  
6. Laws. This EULA will be governed by the laws of Japan.  
All disputes arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the  
exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo District Court.  
7. Export Laws. Any use, duplication or disposal of the Software  
involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled  
under the export laws of applicable countries or region and  
may be subject to the approval of the applicable governmental  
authorities prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly,  
in contravention of the export laws of applicable countries or  
region is prohibited.  
8. Third Party Beneficiary. You agree that certain suppliers of the  
Software to Toshiba have a right as a third party beneficiary to  
enforce the terms of this EULA against you as a user.  
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT  
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS; AND THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO  
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE  
IS WITH YOU. YOU ACCEPT THAT SOFTWARE MAY NOT  
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS AND NO WARRANTY CAN  
BE GIVEN THAT OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE  
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE.  
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT  
LEGALLY PERMITTED, IN NO EVENT SHALL TOSHIBA,  
TOSHIBA'S AFFILIATES OR THEIR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE  
TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES FOR (A) LOST BUSINESS OR  
REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS  
DATA; OR (B) CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL  
OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OF ANY KIND (WHETHER UNDER  
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) ARISING OUT OF:  
(I) THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE,  
EVEN IF TOSHIBA, TOSHIBA'S AFFILIATES OR THEIR  
SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES; OR (II) ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.  
SAVE AS SET OUT IN THIS SECTION, TOSHIBA'S ENTIRE  
LIABILITY UNDER THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE  
PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE, IF ANY.  
PLEASE MAKE AND RETAIN A COPY OF ALL DATA YOU HAVE  
INSERTED INTO YOUR PRODUCT, FOR EXAMPLE NAMES,  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks and Patents  
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the  
following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other  
nations:  
Bluetooth™ is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.USA.  
4,901,307  
5,535,239  
5,416,797  
5,101,501  
5,568,483  
5,056,109  
5,544,196  
5,710,784  
5,504,773  
5,267,262  
5,778,338  
5,511,073  
5,414,796  
5,506,865  
5,337,338  
5,109,390  
5,600,754  
5,490,165  
5,267,261  
5,659,569  
5,228,054  
5,657,420  
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL  
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-  
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN  
COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4  
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS  
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND  
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A  
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG-LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4  
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR  
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT  
RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL  
USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.  
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.  
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun  
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other  
countries.  
The miniSD™ Logo is a trademark.  
T9 Text Input is covered by Japan Pat.No.特  
3532780,3492981 and other patents pending.  
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer  
IIS and Thomson multimedia.  
Powered by Mascot Capsule® / Micro3D Edition™ Mascot Capsule®  
is a registered trademark of HI Corporation © 2002-2003 HI  
Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright © 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights  
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso wave Incorporated.  
reserved.  
Vodafone, Vodafone live!, My Vodafone and Speech Mark Device  
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Vodafone Group Plc.  
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All  
rights reserved.  
V-appli, Movie Sha-mail and Custom Screen are registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Vodafone K.K.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT  
AND/OR BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
THE OpenSSL PROJECT, ERIC YOUNG OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
All other company names and trademarks are the property of their  
respective owners.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Notice  
FCC RF Exposure Information  
The handset may cause TV or radio interference if used in close  
proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop  
using the handset if such interference cannot be eliminated.  
Your handset is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and  
manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to  
radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications  
Commission of the U.S. Government.  
The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by  
independent scientific organisations through periodic and thorough  
evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial  
safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless  
of age and health.  
Information to User  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications.  
The exposure standard for wireless handsets employs a unit of  
measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The  
SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg.  
The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear  
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The  
highest SAR value for this model handset when tested for use at the  
ear is 0.346 W/kg and when worn on the body, as described in this  
user guide, is 0.618 W/kg. Body-worn Operation; This device was  
tested for typical body-worn operations with the back of the handset  
kept 1.5 cm from the body. To maintain compliance with FCC RF  
exposure requirements, use accessories that maintain a 1.5 cm  
separation distance between the user's body and the back of the  
handset. The use of beltclips, holsters and similar accessories should  
not contain metallic components in its assembly.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur  
in a particular installation; if this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
1. Reorient/relocate the receiving aerial.  
2. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the  
manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's  
authority to operate the equipment.  
The use of accessories that do not satisfy these requirements may  
not comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, and should be  
avoided.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorisation for this model  
handset with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance  
The World Health Organization has stated that present scientific  
information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for  
with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR information on this model the use of mobile devices. They note that if you want to reduce your  
handset is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display  
Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on  
SP2-CC4-J01.  
exposure then you can do so by limiting the length of calls or using  
a ‘hands-free’ device to keep the mobile phone away from the head  
and body. Additional Information can be found on the websites of the  
World Health Organization (http://www.who.int/emf).  
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be  
found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association  
(CTIA) website at http://www.phonefacts.net.  
*
The tests are carried out in accordance with international guidelines for  
testing.  
** Please see the <FCC RF Exposure Information> section about body worn  
operation.  
European RF Exposure Information  
Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed  
not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended  
by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by  
the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety  
margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless  
of age and health.  
The guidelines use a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit for mobile devices is 2 W/kg  
and the highest SAR value for this device when tested at the ear was  
0.630 W/kg*. As mobile devices offer a range of functions, they can  
be used in other positions, such as on the body as described in this  
user guide**. In this case, the highest tested SAR value is  
0.838 W/kg.  
As SAR is measured utilizing the devices highest transmitting power  
the actual SAR of this device while operating is typically below that  
indicated above. This is due to automatic changes to the power level  
of the device to ensure it only uses the minimum level required to  
reach the network.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
This chapter explains the basic operations and functions of your handset.  
In This Chapter  
Parts & Functions  
USIM Card  
Battery Pack  
Codes  
Making a Call  
Answering a Call  
Engaged Call Operations  
Call Log  
Optional Services  
Text Entry  
Memory Cards  
Turning Handset Power On/Off  
System Mode Setting  
Language Setting  
Date & Time Settings  
Main Menu  
Phonebook  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts & Functions  
Handset  
!TTACHING THE (ANDSTRAP  
Basic Operations  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Earpiece  
2. Main Display  
3. Left Soft Key : Select items and access the Options menu.  
12. Keypad: Enter phone numbers, characters, etc.  
Press and hold from standby to access Voicemail messages.  
1
To enter " " for making an international call, press and hold  
J
0
Also use this key to access the Messaging menu from standby.  
from standby.  
4. Navigation Key  
: Move cursor up, down, left or right, access  
*/ Key/  
: Switch between uppercase and lowercase.  
*
E
functions assigned to the navigation key, etc.  
Centre Key : Access the Main menu from standby. Use this  
Also use this key to scroll to the previous page in a window  
displaying a list or turn the mobile light on or off during camera  
use.  
@
key to confirm selected items and perform selected operations.  
5. Media Player Key : Start Media Player from standby.  
#
/
Key  
: Enter symbols, etc. Also use this key to scroll to  
#
H
6. Send Key  
: Make and answer calls.  
the next page in a window displaying a list.  
N
7. Cable and Handset Charging Connector: Connect Rapid  
To set or cancel Silent, press and hold  
from standby.  
#
Charger and other devices.  
13. Microphone  
8. Right Soft Key : Return to the previous operation, cancel  
14. Charging Indicator: Lights during charging and goes out when  
K
operations, etc. Also use this key to access Vodafone live! from  
standby.  
charging is complete.  
15. Music Player Keys  
: Play, pause, rewind and forward  
T
9. Multi Task Key : Switch to another function without ending  
music files.  
S
the function currently in use.  
16. External Display: Notifies of incoming calls, received messages  
and other information while your handset is closed.  
17. External Light: Flashes for incoming calls, messages, etc.  
18. Stereo Speakers  
10. Clear/Memo Key  
: Delete characters and return to the  
L
previous operation. Also use this key to access Answerphone  
from standby.  
11. End/Power Key  
: Power handset on/off, end calls/operations 19. Camera Lens  
O
and return to standby.  
20. Mobile Light: Used as a light when taking pictures or recording  
videos at night time or while indoors.  
21. Camera/Video Indicator: Flashes when the camera or video is  
activated.  
22. Internal Antenna: The antenna is built into your handset.  
23. Side Key /Side Key : Move cursor up and down and adjust  
P
Q
the volume. Press and hold to use it as a shortcut key.  
P
24. Handstrap Hole  
Basic Operations  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25. Earphone Microphone/AV OUT Jack: Connect the Stereo  
Handsfree Headset or video output cable.  
26. Memory Card Slot  
27. Side Key : Activate the camera, etc. This key also acts as the  
R
shutter button during camera use. Press and hold while your  
R
handset is closed to set/cancel the Hold setting for the side keys.  
Basic Operations  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Display Indicators  
Signal Strength  
Strong  
Out of Range  
①②③④⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨⑩ ⑪  
    
Moderate  
Weak  
Faint  
12:30  
Offline Mode On (page 229)  
External Connection for Data Synchronisation  
/
Voice/Video Call  
Dial-up Connection (pages 287, 292)  
Secret Mode On (page 246)  
Packet Communication in Progress  
Packet Transmission Ready  
Packet Network Range  
/
/
/
3G/UMTS Network Connection/Roaming  
GSM Network Connection/Roaming  
GPRS Network Connection/Roaming  
⑭⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲  
Service Area of Operator Other than Vodafone  
Reception of High Priority MMS  
Reception of Rights Object  
Indicates the reception of a content key during operation.  
/
New MMS/SMS (pages 153, 161)  
New WAP Push Message (page 161)  
New CAST (page 187)  
Silent (page 209)  
Car (page 209)  
Meeting (page 209)  
Web SSL  
Indicates a connection to an information page with security protection.  
 
/
Bluetooth™ Connection Established/Connection Standby (page 281)  
Bluetooth™ Connection Lost  
Basic Operations  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
/
V-appli Activated/Paused (page 183)  
Music File Playing  
Music File Playback Paused  
Video File Playing  
Streaming (page 99)  
Memory Card Inserted (page 44)  
Battery Level  
    
Sufficiently Charged  
Moderate  
Very Low  
Charge Immediately  
    
    
Low  
Charging (page 43)  
Time  
Phone Lock Active (page 242)  
Alarm Set (page 260)  
Silent and Vibration Set (page 209)  
Silent Set (page 209)  
Vibration Set (page 209)  
Information Prompt (page 38)  
Missed Call (page 59)  
SMS maximum for incoming messages  
Indicates Received Msgs. contains the maximum number of SMS messages.  
New Voicemail Message (page 63)  
Call Diverting without Ringer Set for Voice Call (pages 63, 65)  
Call Diverting without Ringer Set for Video Call (page 65)  
Call Diverting without Ringer Set for Voice and Video Calls (page 65)  
/
/
/
/
/
Answerphone On and You Have a Message (pages 56, 230)  
Answerphone Off and You Have a Message (pages 56, 230)  
Basic Operations  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External Display Indicators  
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩  
Signal Strength  
    
12:30  
Strong  
Moderate  
Weak  
Faint  
Out of Range  
Offline Mode On (page 229)  
External Connection for Data Synchronisation  
Packet Communication  
Packet Transmission Ready  
Packet Network Range  
/
/
/
3G/UMTS Network Connection/Roaming  
GSM Network Connection/Roaming  
GPRS Network Connection/Roaming  
Service Area of Operator Other than Vodafone  
Reception of High Priority MMS  
Reception of Rights Object  
Indicates the reception of a content key during operation.  
/
New MMS/SMS (pages 153, 161)  
New WAP Push Message (page 161)  
New CAST (page 187)  
Silent  
Web SSL  
Car  
Meeting  
Indicates a connection to an information page with security protection.  
/
Bluetooth™ Connection Established/Connection Standby (page 281)  
Bluetooth™ Connection Lost  
Phone Lock Active (page 242)  
Hold Active (page 248)  
Basic Operations  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
All Playback Mode  
Repeat Playback Mode  
Repeat All Playback Mode  
Random Playback Mode  
One Track Playback Mode  
/
V-appli Activated/Paused (page 183)  
Alarm Set (page 260)  
Background Playback  
Background Playback Paused  
Music Player Cannot be Started  
New Voicemail Message (page 63)  
/
/
/
/
/
Answerphone On and You Have a Message (pages 56, 230)  
Answerphone Off and You Have a Message (pages 56, 230)  
Missed Call (page 59)  
Memory Card Inserted (page 44)  
Battery Level  
Sufficiently Charged  
Moderate  
Very Low  
Charge Immediately  
Low  
Charging (page 43)  
Time  
Basic Operations  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Prompt  
Information Prompt appears to inform you of missed calls, new messages and other  
information.  
Tip  
To close Information Prompt,  
1. When Information Prompt appears, scroll to an item and press (Select).  
J
press (Back) or  
Kk  
. To  
Oo  
The following items are available.  
redisplay Information Prompt,  
press and hold  
.
@a  
Missed Calls: Missed calls (page 59).  
New SMS: Unread SMS (page 161).  
New MMS: Unread MMS (page 153).  
New Push: New WAP Push message(s) (page 161).  
New Reports: Unread delivery report(s) (pages 158, 163).  
New CAST Contents: Content update(s) available (page 187).  
CAST Information: CAST update failed (page 187).  
Voicemail: New message(s) at Voicemail Centre (page 63).  
Stop Snooze: Cancel snooze (page 261).  
Basic Operations  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USIM Card  
Before using your handset, be sure to do the following.  
Insert the USIM card in your handset.  
Insert the battery pack in your handset (page 42).  
About the USIM Card  
The USIM card contains customer information such as your phone number. Only insert  
the USIM card in a USIM card compatible handset. If the USIM card is not inserted, the  
handset cannot be used. Do not touch or damage the IC when handling the USIM card.  
Inserting & Removing the USIM Card  
Before inserting or removing the USIM card, remove the battery pack. For details on  
removing the battery pack, see page 42.  
1. Open the battery cover and remove the battery pack.  
2. Insert USIM card straight, making sure the IC portion is facing down (as shown in  
the illustration to the left).  
To remove the USIM card, press down on point (shown in the diagram to the left)  
A
and slide it out.  
A
Basic Operations  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USIM PINs  
For security, the USIM card has two security codes: PIN 1 and PIN 2. Do not forget these  
codes and do not reveal them to others.  
PIN1  
This is a four to eight digit security code to prevent others from using your handset. The  
default setting is “9999.”  
PIN2  
This is the four to eight digit security code required for operations such as resetting Call  
Costs and setting Fixed Dialling Numbers. The default setting is “9999.”  
PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) Codes  
PUK codes are required to cancel PIN1 lock and PIN2 lock. PIN1/PIN2 lock is set when  
an incorrect PIN1 or PIN2 is entered three times consecutively. To obtain the PUK1/  
PUK2 code, contact Vodafone General Information (page 315). If the PUK1/PUK2 code  
is incorrectly entered ten times in a row, the USIM card is locked. There is no way to  
cancel the USIM card lock. Contact Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
Basic Operations  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Emergency Calls  
Emergency calls (110, 119 and 118) are available, even when the following restrictions  
are set.  
Note  
• If System Mode is set to UMTS  
Only or GSM Only, you cannot  
make or receive any calls,  
• Offline Mode (page 229).  
• Phone Lock (page 242).  
• Fixed Dialling Numbers (page 246).  
• Call Barring (page 67).  
including emergency calls  
(110, 119 and 118), when the  
selected network is unavailable.  
Functions that use a network  
connection are also unavailable.  
Change the System Mode  
setting to use the function.  
• During global roaming, use  
the phone numbers of the  
emergency services of the  
country you are in. Confirm the  
phone numbers beforehand.  
A connection cannot be  
guaranteed in every country  
and area because operation  
differs depending on the  
wireless network, wireless  
signal and function settings of  
your handset.  
• If a video call is made to an  
emergency service, the call  
becomes a voice call.  
• An emergency call cannot be  
made while you are performing  
data communication in an area  
with GSM coverage.  
Basic Operations  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Pack  
Before using your handset for the first time, charge the battery.  
Inserting & Removing the Battery Pack  
1. Press down on the battery cover lightly and slide it towards the bottom of your  
handset.  
2. Lift up battery cover.  
3. Insert battery pack. Make sure to align bottom of the battery pack with the connector  
when inserting battery pack.  
To remove the battery pack, insert a fingernail beneath the side or bottom tab and  
lift out the battery pack.  
4. Place the battery cover on your handset and slide it until it clicks into place.  
Basic Operations  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Charging the Battery Pack  
The charging time is approximately 140 minutes.  
1. Open the external connector cover of your handset and insert the connector of the  
rapid charger.  
2. Insert the AC adapter plug into an AC outlet.  
The charging indicator illuminates and charging begins.  
3. After the charging indicator goes out, remove the AC adapter plug from the outlet.  
4. Press release buttons (on both sides of the connector) to remove the connector from  
your handset.  
Note  
• The rapid charger supports a  
power supply of 100 to 240 V  
AC.  
• The rapid charger plug is for  
use in Japan. To use the rapid  
charger in another country,  
purchase an appropriate  
adapter plug. Vodafone accepts  
no liability whatsoever for any  
problem resulting from charging  
overseas.  
Basic Operations  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Cards  
About Memory Cards  
You can save the pictures you take, videos you record and various downloaded files to a  
memory card.  
This manual refers to a miniSD™ memory card as a “memory card.”  
For details on saving files to a memory card, see the corresponding explanation  
for each function.  
Your handset supports memory cards with a storage capacity of up to 1GB (as  
of March 2006). There is no guarantee that all memory cards will work with your  
handset because an operation check has not been performed for all memory  
cards.  
If a memory card is removed while reading or writing data, the data may be lost or  
the memory card may be damaged.  
Inserting & Removing a Memory Card  
1. Open the memory card slot cover.  
Note  
2. Gently push a memory card into the slot until it clicks into position.  
Gently push and release the memory card to eject it.  
3. Close the memory card slot cover.  
• Do not use excessive force to  
open the memory card slot  
cover. Doing so may damage  
the cover.  
• The memory card may pop out  
abruptly when removing it from  
your handset. Be cautious when  
ejecting the memory card.  
Basic Operations  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning Handset Power On/Off  
Turning Handset Power On  
1. Press and hold  
.
O
Note  
If the PIN1 Code Request (page 240) is set to On, enter your PIN1 code.  
The following windows appear the  
first time you turn on the power of  
your handset or after you clear the  
memory.  
Turning Handset Power Off  
1. In standby mode, press and hold  
.
O
Date&Time Settings (page 50).  
Retrieving Network Information  
(page 252) (appears when you  
press  
,
,
or in  
@a Jj Kk Aa  
standby mode).  
Basic Operations  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Mode Setting  
Set the network (telecommunications carrier) and system mode to use. You can also set  
the network connection information for using the Web and email.  
Selecting the Network  
Set the network by selecting an available network in your current area automatically or  
selecting a network manually from a list.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Network Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Select Network and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Select Network and press (Select).  
J
5. Select an item and press (OK).  
J
Automatic: Selects an available network automatically.  
Manual: Handset searches and displays available networks. Select a network  
from the list. Available networks are indicated by the  
or  
indicator.  
Basic Operations  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a Network  
You can add up to five new networks.  
1. After Step 3 of “Selecting the Network” (page 46), select Add New Network and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select <Empty> and press (Options).  
J
3. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
4. Select an item and press  
.
@
5. Enter the item and press  
.
@
6. Press (Options) after the settings the items.  
J
7. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
Preferred Setting  
In the Preferred Network list, you can set the priority order for selecting networks.  
1. After Step 3 of “Selecting the Network” (page 46), select Set Preferred and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Press (Options).  
J
3. Select an operation and press (Select).  
J
Add: Select a network from the Network list and add it to the bottom of the  
Preferred Network list.  
Insert: Select a network from the Network list and insert it in a specified place in  
the Preferred Network list.  
Move: Select a network and change the order by moving the network in the list.  
Delete: Delete the selected network.  
Basic Operations  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the System Mode  
Set the handset to select the system mode from UMTS (3G) or GSM automatically or set  
the system mode fixed to UMTS or GSM. Setting UMTS Only when using your handset  
in Japan and Dual when using your handset overseas is recommended.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Network Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select System Mode and press (Select).  
J
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Dual: Select the available system mode automatically.  
UMTS Only: Set the system mode to UMTS only.  
GSM Only: Set the system mode to GSM only.  
Basic Operations  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Language Setting  
Change the language displayed on your handset.  
1. In Standby mode, press , select /Settings and press (選択 Select).  
/
@
J
2. Select 一般設/Phone Settings and press (選択 Select).  
/
J
3. Select Language/言語選択 and press (選択 Select).  
/
J
4. Select language and press (選択 Select).  
/
J
自動選/Automatic: Select the language set for the language setting in the  
USIM card automatically.  
日本語 : Set the language to Japanese.  
English: Set the language to English.  
Basic Operations  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date & Time Settings  
Setting the Date & Time  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
• You can enter a date from  
2000/01/02 to 2099/12/30.  
Enter the time in accordance  
with the 24-hour system.  
• You can switch the clock  
display between the 12-hour  
and 24-hour system (page  
221).  
3. Select Date&Time and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Set Date/Time and press (Select).  
J
5. Enter the year, month, day and time and press (OK).  
J
Basic Operations  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
World Clock Setting  
You can set or modify City 1 and City 2 displayed on the world clock, adjust the time  
difference and set summer time. For details on displaying the world clock, see page  
270.  
Setting City 1/City 2  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Date & Time and press (Select).  
J
4. Select World Clock and press (Select).  
J
5. Select City 1 or City 2 and press (Select).  
J
6. Use  
to select a city and press  
.
@
F
The green longitude line on the map indicates the position of the city set for City 1.  
The red longitude line indicates the position of the city set for City 2.  
Basic Operations  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the GMT Offset  
Select a city by entering a GMT time difference.  
1. After Step 5 of “Setting City 1/City 2” (page 51), press (Options).  
J
2. Select GMT Offset and press (Select).  
J
To switch between + and  
-, press (Options) and select +/-.  
J
3. Use to select the time difference and press  
twice.  
G
@
Setting the Daylight Saving Time (DST)  
1. After Step 5 of “Setting City 1/City 2” (page 51), press (Options).  
J
Tip  
2. Select DST On/Off and press (Select).  
J
If the DST setting is set to On, the  
indicator appears on the display  
when you set (page 51) or display  
(page 270) the world clock. The  
3. Select On or Off and press (OK).  
J
indicator appears for the time  
displayed in standby mode.  
Editing City Names  
1. After Step 5 of “Setting City 1/City 2” (page 51), press (Options).  
J
Tip  
2. Select Edit City Name and press (Select).  
J
To reset all city names, select  
Reset City Name after Step 1.  
3. Enter a city name and press  
.
@
Switching the Main City  
1. After Step 4 of “Setting City 1/City 2” (page 51), select Set as Main City and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select City 1 or City 2 and press (Select).  
J
Basic Operations  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Menu  
Accessing Functions from Main Menu  
1. Press  
to open Main menu.  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
@
}
}
-ENU .AME  
       
 
 i Ã Ã > ˆ ˜  
2. Use  
to select an icon and press (Select).  
E
J
%NTERTAINMENT 6ODAFONE LIVEꢀ -EDIA0LAYER  
Entertainment: Access games and CAST functions.  
#URSOR  
Vodafone live!: Access Vodafone live! menu and download pictures, melodies  
#AMERA  
-ESSAGING $ATA &OLDER  
and applications (page 172).  
MediaPlayer: Play audio and video files (page 96).  
Camera: Take pictures and record videos (page 117).  
4OOLS  
0HONEEBOOK  
3ETTINGS  
- i  i V Ì  
> V Ž  
Main Menu Window  
Messaging: Create MMS/SMS messages. Also check received and sent MMS/  
SMS messages (page 146).  
Data Folder: Save/access files here (page 193).  
Tools: Access preinstalled accessories (page 256).  
Phonebook: Save and access contacts information (page 78).  
Settings: Modify and confirm handset settings (page 209).  
Basic Operations  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Codes  
Security Code  
“9999” or the four-digit number selected at time of subscription. This code is required  
to use some functions/services.  
Centre Access Code  
The four-digit number selected at time of subscription. It is required to access optional  
services from landlines.  
Call Barring Service Code  
The four-digit number selected at time of subscription. Use this code to set call barring  
(page 67).  
Basic Operations  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Call  
1. Confirm that the power is on.  
Tip  
Confirm that the signal level is sufficient.  
Touching the internal antenna part (page 32) of your handset affects signal strength.  
Avoid touching this part of your handset during use.  
• In standby mode, enter a  
number and press (Options)  
Jj  
to perform the following:  
Voice Call: Make a voice call.  
Video Call: Make a video  
call (page 107).  
2. Enter a phone number.  
To correct a number, press (Clear) or  
to delete the last number entered.  
K
L
Save to Contacts: Save  
the phone number to the  
Contacts list (page 79).  
Send Message: Create an  
SMS/MMS message (pages  
148, 159).  
3. Press  
.
N
O
4. Press  
to end the call.  
Making an International Call  
1. Press and hold  
.
0
Manual Hyphen: Enter a  
“-.”  
+ appears.  
Pause: Enter pause (P)  
when sending touch tones  
(page 278).  
International Call: Adds the  
international code and country  
code (page 235).  
2. Enter country code, area code and phone number.  
If the phone number begins with 0, omit the 0.  
3. Press  
.
N
Hide My ID: Hides your number  
from the other party (page 237).  
Show My ID: Shows your  
number to the other party  
(page 237).  
• You can also make a call from  
the Contacts list (page 86) or  
the call log (page 59).  
Basic Operations  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answering a Call  
Ringtone plays and external light flashes for incoming calls. If the phone number is in  
the Contacts list (page 86), the name and phone number of the caller appear on the  
display.  
Tip  
• To adjust the ringtone volume  
while a call is being received,  
1. Press  
when a call is received.  
to end the call.  
N
O
use  
or the side keys ( / ).  
Pp Qq  
Ga  
2. Press  
If you miss a call, the information  
prompt (page 38) appears.  
Placing an Incoming Call on Hold  
• You can also use Open to  
Answer (page 239) or Any Key  
Answer (page 239) to answer a  
call.  
Place an incoming call on hold when you are unable to answer it right away.  
1. Press (Hold) when a call is received.  
J
2. Press (Unhold) to answer the call.  
J
3. Press  
to end the call.  
O
Recording a Message with the Answerphone  
Record a caller’s message when you are unable to answer a voice call. The Answerphone can  
save up to three messages and each message can be up to 15 seconds long.  
Tip  
• To answer a call while the  
answer message is playing or  
a caller’s message is being  
1. Press and hold  
when a call is received.  
L
Rejecting a Call  
recorded, press (Answer).  
Jj  
• For details on playing recording  
files, see page 231.  
You can manually reject an incoming call. To automatically reject calls from specific  
phone numbers, add the phone numbers to the Rejection list (page 244).  
1. Press  
when a call is received.  
O
Basic Operations  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engaged Call Operations  
Options Available during a Call  
Tip  
In areas with 3G-network coverage  
(UMTS areas), you can receive  
voice calls during Web browsing  
and receive messages and other  
information during voice calls.  
Press (Options) during a call to perform the following.  
J
Hold: Place the call on hold.  
Mute My Voice: Mute the outgoing sound.  
Mute All: Mute both the outgoing and incoming sound.  
Contacts List: Access Contacts list (page 86).  
Call Log: Access call logs (page 59).  
Voice Record: Record the other party’s voice (page 58).  
My Details: Display the owner information (page 94).  
DTMF Off/On: Disable or enable DTMF tones.  
Basic Operations  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Earpiece Volume  
1. Press  
or a side key ( / ) during a call.  
P Q  
G
Tip  
The current setting appears.  
2. Use or a side key ( / ) to adjust the earpiece volume.  
To adjust the earpiece volume in  
standby mode, press and hold  
E
P Q  
or  
Aa Ba  
and use  
adjust the volume.  
to  
aE  
• For handsfree calling, press  
(
) to switch sound from  
Kk  
earpiece to speaker.  
Recording Other Party's Voice  
Voice Record allows you to record the other party’s voice during a call. Maximum  
recording time is 60 seconds.  
Note  
Only the other party’s voice  
is recorded. Your voice is not  
recorded.  
Recording stops when  
maximum time is reached or  
the call ends.  
1. Press (Options) during a call.  
J
2. Select Voice Record and press (Select).  
J
The recording is automatically  
saved to the Recordings folder.  
Tip  
For details on playing Voice Record  
recordings, see page 266.  
Basic Operations  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Log  
Viewing Dialled Numbers/Missed Calls/Received Calls  
Tip  
• Press  
to directly access Dialled  
Numbers.  
• Press  
to directly access Received  
Calls.  
from standby mode  
Da  
You can view the last 20 dialled numbers, missed calls and received calls.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
from standby mode  
aC  
2. Select Call Log and press (Select).  
J
The Call Log window appears.  
• From Dialled Numbers, Missed  
Calls or Received Calls, press  
3. Select Dialled Numbers, Missed Calls or Received Calls and press  
.
@
(Options) to perform the  
Jj  
To switch from the Dialled No. window to the Missed Calls window or Received Calls  
window, use  
following:  
.
F
View: See call details.  
Voice Call: Make a voice call.  
Video Call: Make a video call  
(page 107).  
Send Message: Creates an  
SMS/MMS message (pages  
148, 159).  
Save to Contacts: Save to  
Contacts list (page 79).  
To Rejection List: Save to  
Rejection list (page 244).  
Delete: Delete the entry.  
International Call: Add the  
international code and country  
code (page 235).  
Hide My ID: (page 237).  
Show My ID: (page 237).  
Basic Operations  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Call Time  
Viewing Last Call/All Calls  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Log and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Call Timers and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Last Call or All Calls and press (Select).  
J
To reset the call time, select Reset Timers.  
Basic Operations  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Call Costs  
View the cost for the last call or the total costs for all calls. The data for the total costs is  
saved to the USIM card.  
Note  
The displayed call cost serves as a  
guide only and may differ from the  
actual call cost billed.  
Viewing Last Call/All Calls  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Log and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Call Costs and press (Select).  
J
The Call Costs list appears.  
4. Select Last Call or All Calls and press (Select).  
J
To reset the call costs, select Reset Costs.  
Setting the Currency  
Set the currency for call costs.  
1. After Step 3 of "Viewing Last Call/All Calls" (above), select Cost Unit and press  
J
(Select).  
The currency and rate appear.  
2. Press (Change).  
J
3. Enter your PIN2 code and press (OK).  
J
4. Enter a currency (three characters) and press  
.
@
5. Enter a rate and press (OK).  
J
Basic Operations  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Call Cost Display  
Set whether to display the call cost after a call ends.  
1. After Step 3 of "Viewing Last Call/All Calls" (page 61), select Call Cost Display and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Viewing Data Transfer Volume  
View the packet communication data volume for the last session or all sessions.  
Viewing Last Data/All Data  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Log and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Data Counter and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Last Data or All Data and press (Select).  
J
To reset the data transfer volume, select Reset Data Counts.  
Basic Operations  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Services  
For details on services, contact Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
Voicemail  
Transfer calls to Voicemail Centre (ie: when your handset is out of range or a call is in  
progress). appears when you have a new message.  
Activating Voicemail  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
• To change the number for  
diverting calls to the Voicemail  
Centre or the number for  
accessing the Voicemail Centre  
to listen to voicemail, select  
Voicemail Centre after Step 4.  
However, do not change these  
numbers unless Vodafone  
informs you that they have  
been changed.  
3. Select Voicemail and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Voicemail Settings and press (Select).  
J
The Voicemail Settings window appears.  
5. Select Registration and press (Select).  
J
6. Select a diverting condition and press (Request/Select).  
J
All Calls: All calls are diverted. Ringer is off.  
When Busy: Press (Divert) to divert an incoming call.  
K
• To confirm settings, select  
Status after Step 4 and press  
Not Reachable: Divert a call when handset power is off or out of range.  
No Answer: Divert a call if you do not answer it within the set time. Set the  
answer time.  
(Request).  
Jj  
All Conditional: Divert a call that meets all of the above conditions except All  
Calls. Set the answer time.  
Basic Operations  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Your Voicemail  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
Press and hold  
in standby for  
1/  
3. Select Voicemail and press (Select).  
J
quick access to your voicemail  
messages.  
4. Select Call Voicemail and press (Call).  
J
Follow the voice prompts.  
Deactivating Voicemail  
1. After Step 4 of "Activating Voicemail" (page 63), select Deactivate and press  
J
(Request).  
Basic Operations  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Diverting  
Forward incoming calls to a preset phone number.  
Tip  
• To confirm the current setting  
of all Call Divert types, select  
Status after Step 3 and press  
Activating Call Divert  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
(Request).  
Jj  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
• To confirm the current setting  
of a Call Divert type, select  
3. Select Call Diverting and press (Select).  
Status after Step 4 and press  
4. Select a call type and press (Select).  
J
(Request).  
Jj  
All Services: Set diverting condition for all call types.  
Voice Call: Set diverting condition for voice calls.  
Video Call: Set diverting condition for video calls.  
5. Select a diverting condition and press (Select).  
J
All Calls: All calls are diverted to the preset number. The ringer does not sound  
before forwarding the call.  
When Busy: Incoming call is diverted when you press (Divert).  
No Answer: Divert a call if you do not answer it within the set time. Set the  
K
answer time.  
Not Reachable: Divert a call when your handset is out of range or the power is  
off.  
All Conditional: Divert a call that meets all of the above conditions except All  
Calls. Set the answer time.  
Basic Operations  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Select an input method and press (Select).  
J
From Phonebook: Select an entry from the Contacts list (page 86) and press  
.
.
@
Set Number: Enter a phone number and press (OK).  
J
From Call Log: Select a phone number from the call log (page 59) and press  
@
7. Press (Set/Request).  
J
Deactivating Call Divert  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Call Divert” (page 65), select Deactivate All and  
press (Request).  
J
To stop call divert services individually, select Deactivate after Step 4 of “Activating  
Call Divert” (page 65) and press (Request).  
J
Basic Operations  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Barring  
Restrict outgoing and incoming voice calls, video calls and SMS messages.  
Activating Call Barring  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
• You can still make calls to  
110 (police), 119 (fire and  
ambulance) and 118 (coast  
guard) when the call barring  
service is activated.  
3. Select Call Barring and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Activate and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Outgoing Calls or Incoming Calls and press (Select).  
J
• To confirm the status of the  
6. Select a barring condition and press (Request).  
J
setting, select Status after  
Step 3 and press (Request).  
Jj  
All Calls: Stop all outgoing and incoming calls.  
International Calls: Stop all outgoing and incoming international calls.  
Except Local/Home: Stop all outgoing international calls except to Japan (only  
for outgoing calls).  
7. Enter your call barring service code (page 54).  
Basic Operations  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deactivating Call Barring  
1. After Step 3 of "Activating Call Barring" (page 67), select Deactivate and press  
J
(Select).  
2. Select Outgoing Calls, Incoming Calls or All and press (Request).  
J
3. Enter your call barring service code (page 54).  
Changing Your Call Barring Service Code  
1. After Step 3 of "Activating Call Barring" (page 67), select Change Password and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Enter your current call barring service code (page 54).  
3. Enter your new call barring service code and press (OK).  
J
4. Re-enter your new call barring service code for confirmation and press (OK).  
J
Basic Operations  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Waiting  
Place a call on hold to take another call. The caller’s name and phone number appear if  
the information is saved in Contacts list (page 86).  
Activating Call Waiting  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
To confirm the current Call Waiting  
3. Select Call Waiting and press (Select).  
J
setting, select Status after Step 3  
and press (Request).  
Jj  
The Call Waiting settings window appears.  
4. Select Activate and press (Request).  
J
Basic Operations  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Call Waiting  
1. When the call waiting tone is heard, Press (Options).  
J
If the phone number is saved in Contacts List (page 86), the name and phone  
number of the caller appear on the display.  
2. Select Answer and press (Select).  
J
The original caller is placed on hold and a connection is established with the second  
caller.  
3. Press  
to switch between callers.  
N
Deactivating Call Waiting  
1. After Step 3 of "Activating Call Waiting" (page 69), select Deactivate and press  
J
(Request).  
Basic Operations  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiparty Call  
Call other parties during a call and switch between the parties or talk to multiple parties  
simultaneously. Connect with up to five parties simultaneously. The phone numbers of  
all the parties appear on the display during the call. This service is unavailable for video  
calls.  
Note  
The options that are available vary  
depending on the call status.  
1. Enter a phone number during a call and press  
.
N
The original party is placed on hold and you can talk to another party.  
2. Press (Options) to perform one of the following operations.  
J
Swap: Switch your connection between parties.  
Multiparty: Perform the following operations.  
• Multiparty: Talk to all parties.  
• Private: Talk to the selected party only (private call).  
• Hold: Place the selected party on hold.  
• Hold All: Place all parties on hold.  
• End Call: End call with selected party.  
• End All Calls: End calls with all parties.  
Mute My Voice: Mute outgoing sound.  
Mute All: Mute outgoing and incoming sound.  
Contacts List: Access Contacts list (page 86).  
Call Log: Access call logs (page 59).  
Voice Record: Record the other party's voice (page 58).  
My Details: Display owner information (page 94).  
DTMF Off/On: Toggle DTMF (touch tone) on or off.  
Basic Operations  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Text Entry  
Text Entry Modes  
Switching between Japanese Entry Mode and English Entry Mode  
Switch between Japanese entry mode and English entry (T9) mode.  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options).  
J
2. Select Japanese Entry or English Entry (T9) and press (Select).  
J
Switching Text Entry Modes  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options).  
J
Tip  
• In T9 mode or Multi Tap mode:  
2. Select Input Method and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a text entry mode and press (Select).  
J
Press and hold  
switch between T9 mode  
and Multi Tap mode.  
to  
*<  
T9 abc/T9 Abc/T9 ABC: Enter characters in T9 mode.  
abc/Abc/ABC (Multi Tap mode): Enter roman letters using the keypad.  
Symbols: Symbols input mode.  
Press  
to switch between  
*<  
initial caps, lowercase,  
numeric and uppercase  
input modes.  
Numeric: Numeric input mode.  
Press  
to enter a space.  
0/  
Press and hold a digit key to  
enter a number.  
• To enter +, press and hold  
in a numeric input mode.  
0/  
Basic Operations  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Characters in T9 Mode  
In T9 mode, press a key once for each letter you want to enter. This feature displays  
word predictions while you enter characters.  
Tip  
Example: Entering "dog"  
• To enter a symbol, press  
1/  
and use  
• To delete a character, press  
(Clear) or  
to select a symbol.  
Ga  
1. Press  
.
364  
Kk  
2. Press  
to display the next prediction.  
B
.
L/  
• If the word you want does not  
appear in the predictions list,  
add it to the T9 dictionary  
(page 77).  
3. Press (Select) to confirm your selection.  
J
Entering Characters in Multi Tap Mode  
In Multi Tap mode, each press of a key cycles through the letters and symbols assigned  
to the key.  
Tip  
Example: Entering "dog"  
• To enter a symbol, press  
• To delete a character, press  
.
Kk  
/1  
1. Press  
once,  
three times and  
once.  
3
6
4
(Clear) or  
.
L/  
Entering Symbols & Pictographs  
1. In a text entry window, press  
.
#
#
@
Tip  
To enter a pictograph, press  
again.  
You can also enter a space from the  
symbol window.  
2. Select a character and press  
.
Basic Operations  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Text  
Undo/Redo  
During text input, you can undo and redo operations.  
Note  
1. In a text entry window, enter characters.  
Performing the Redo operation  
after the Undo operation takes  
you back to the state prior to  
performing the Undo operation.  
2. Press (Options), select Undo/Redo and press (Select).  
J
J
Copy/Cut  
Copy or cut a range of characters and store it in the clipboard. You can store up to 20  
data items in the clipboard.  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options), select Copy or Cut and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Use  
to move the cursor to the first character of the text range and press  
E
J
(Start).  
3. Use  
to move the cursor to the last character of the text range and press (End).  
E
J
Paste  
In a text entry window, you can paste characters stored in the clipboard.  
1. In a text entry window, use to position the cursor.  
E
2. Press (Options), select Paste and press (Select).  
J
J
3. Select the item from the clipboard and press  
.
@
Basic Operations  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Text Range  
Select text to use Text Range features (ie: Save text to Words list, delete text, etc.). This  
operation is only available in Japanese Entry (page 72).  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options), select Define Range and press  
J
J
(Select).  
2. Use  
to move the cursor to the beginning of the text range and press (Start).  
E
E
J
3. Use  
to move the cursor to the end of the text range and press (End).  
J
4. Select the editing method for the selected text and press (Select).  
J
Save to Word List: Save text to Words list.  
Save to Notepad: Save text to Notepad.  
Save to Contacts: Save phone numbers or email addresses to Contacts list.  
Convert: Reconvert text to Kana, Chinese characters, single-byte characters,  
upper-case letters or lower-case letters.  
Replace: Save text range to clipboard. Previously saved text is overwritten.  
Delete: Delete selected text.  
Insert  
Select information from notepad (page 268), Contacts list (page 86) or My Details (page  
94) and insert it during text entry. You can also insert a signature in an MMS or SMS  
message.  
1. In a text entry window, use  
to position the cursor.  
E
2. Press (Options), select Insert and press (Select).  
J
J
Basic Operations  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Notepad: Insert information saved to a notepad entry.  
Signature: Insert MMS Signature (page 158) or SMS Signature (page 163).  
Contact Details: Insert information saved to a Contacts list entry.  
My Details: Insert information saved to My Details (page 94).  
URL history: Insert a recently entered URL.  
Phone number: Insert your phone number.  
Move Cursor  
Move the cursor to the beginning or end. This operation is only available in Japanese  
Entry (page 72).  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options), select Move Cursor and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select To End or To Top and press (Select).  
J
Basic Operations  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customise  
Configure the settings for editing characters. This operation is only available in Japanese  
Entry (page 72).  
Tip  
To edit or delete Words list entries,  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options), select Customise and press (Select).  
J
J
press  
in standby mode, select  
a@  
2. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Settings, select Phone Settings  
and select Words List.  
Edit Word List: Add entries to the Words list. You can also reset the prediction  
function.  
Prediction: Set Prediction on or off. This feature is only available in Kanji  
Conversion mode ( ).  
Input Method: Switch to pager input.  
Font Size: Change font size.  
Line Feed: Set Line Feed on or off.  
Keys to Convert: Assign the navigation key operation for selecting candidates in  
the prediction area.  
Adding a Word to the T9 Dictionary  
If a conversion doesn’t appear in the conversion prediction list, add it to the T9  
dictionary. The next time you enter text in T9 mode, the conversion will appear in the  
prediction list.  
Tip  
If (Spell) appears for a word  
during character input in T9  
mode, the word is not in the T9  
dictionary. To add the word to the  
Jj  
1. In a text entry window, press (Options), select Add to Dictionary and press  
J
J
(Select).  
T9 dictionary, press (Spell).  
Jj  
Add to Dictionary menu is only available in T9 mode.  
2. Enter the word and press (OK).  
J
When you enter a word, the mode switches automatically to Multi Tap.  
Basic Operations  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phonebook  
    
£ Ó \ Î ä  
To access Phonebook menu, press  
in standby mode, select Phonebook and press  
@
 
*  œ ˜ i L œ œ Ž  
(Select). The Phonebook menu contains the following items.  
J
 
 ˆ Ã «  > Þ Ã Ê >   Ê Þ œ Õ À Ê V œ ˜ Ì > V Ì Ã  
 v À œ  Ê Ì  i Ê -   ] Ê *  œ ˜ i Ê > ˜ `  
Contacts List: Access Contacts entries.  
Create Contact: Add a new entry to Contacts List.  
Call Log: Access the Call Log menu (page 59).  
Manage Category: Display the Category list for organising entries by category.  
Manage Group: Display the Group list. Groups allow you to send the same  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 œ ˜ Ì > V Ì Ã Ê  ˆ Ã Ì  
 À i > Ì i Ê  œ ˜ Ì > V Ì  
 >   Ê  œ }  
 > ˜ > } i Ê  > Ì i } œ À Þ  
 > ˜ > } i Ê  À œ Õ «  
- i ˜ ` Ê  Þ Ê Û  > À `  
- i  i V Ì  
> V Ž  
message simultaneously to multiple addresses.  
Phonebook Menu Window  
Send My vCard: Convert the owner information to vCard format and send it to an  
external device.  
My Details: Display and edit owner information.  
Settings: Add an entry to the Speed Calling list, set the storage place of the  
Contacts list, set the scroll speed for the Contacts list window and set Phonebook  
Lock.  
Memory Status: Display the number of Contacts list entries in your handset,  
USIM card and memory card.  
Basic Operations  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding an Entry to the Contacts List  
You can save up to 500 Contacts list entries to your handset. You can also save Contacts  
list entries to the USIM card and a memory card. The maximum number of entries  
you can save depends on the size of entries and available space in the USIM card or  
memory card.  
    
£ Ó \ Î ä  
  > Ã Ì Ê   >  i  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > Ã Ì Ê   >  i  
 ˆ À Ã Ì Ê   >  i  
Adding an Entry from the Main Menu  
Add new entries from the Create Contact window. You can set just the required items  
and modify items or set additional items later.  
} -  
®
®
, i > ` ˆ ˜  > Ã Ì Ê   >  i  
, i > ` ˆ ˜  ˆ À Ã Ì Ê   >  i  
} -  
«
Þ
 ˆ Ã  >   >  i  
Ê
*  œ ˜ i Ê   Õ  L i À  
  > ˆ   
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
«
"
> V Ž  
2. Select Create Contact and press (Select).  
J
Create Contact Window of the Handset’s Contacts List  
3. Select an item and press  
.
@
The input window for the selected item appears.  
Note  
Last Name  
First Name  
• The entry cannot be saved  
unless information is entered  
in one of the following fields:  
Last Name, First Name, Phone  
Number or Email.  
Reading (Last Name): Display the reading of the last name automatically. You  
can edit the reading.  
• When you save an entry to the  
USIM card, items are restricted.  
Both the first and last names  
are entered in the Name field.  
• Picture, Sound/Secret, Location  
and Note cannot be set for the  
Contacts list of a memory card.  
Reading (First Name): Display the reading of the first name automatically. You  
can edit the reading.  
Display Name: Display the last name and first name you entered automatically.  
You can also edit the display name.  
Phone Number: Enter up to three phone numbers. You can enter up to 40 digits  
for each phone number.  
Email: Enter up to three email addresses.  
Postcode  
Basic Operations  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country  
State  
City  
Street Address  
Add Info.: Enter additional address information.  
Job Title: Enter a job title.  
Company: Enter a company name.  
Birthday  
URL: Enter a URL.  
Category: Set the category.  
Tip  
• You can also add a new entry if  
you press (Options) from the  
Jj  
Contacts list and select Create  
Contact.  
• You can preset the default  
storage place for Contacts list  
entries. For details, see “Setting  
the Default Storage Place”  
(page 92).  
• To clear an item you entered,  
select Clear Field after Step 5.  
Picture: Set a picture to appear on the display for an incoming call (page 81).  
Sound/Secret: Set the ringtone and other settings for incoming calls (page 82).  
Location: Displays location information.  
Note: Enter a reminder.  
4. Enter the item and press  
.
@
5. Press (Options).  
J
6. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
Adding an Entry from Standby Mode  
1. In standby mode, enter a phone number and press  
.
@
2. Select Add New Contact and press (Select).  
J
To add the phone number to an existing Contacts list entry, select Add to Existing.  
3. Proceed from Step 3 of “Adding an Entry from the Main Menu” (page 79).  
Basic Operations  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Incoming Settings  
Setting a Picture  
1. In Step 3 of “Adding an Entry from the Main Menu” (page 79), select Picture and  
Note  
press  
.
@
If a video file is set as the ringtone,  
the video is displayed for incoming  
calls and the picture set as the  
incoming picture is not displayed.  
2. Select Take Picture or My Pictures and press (Select).  
J
Take Picture: Activate the camera for you to take a picture. For details on taking  
pictures, see page 121. After taking a picture, press  
.
@
My Pictures: Select a picture from Data Folder (page 193).  
To select a file, press . If the selected picture is too large, change the size.  
@
Tip  
3. Press (Options).  
J
To reset the picture setting, select  
Remove Picture after Step 3.  
4. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
To save the entry, at least one of Last Name, First Name, Phone Number and Email  
needs to be set (page 79).  
Basic Operations  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Ringtone & Other Settings  
Set the incoming external light, ringtone volume, ringtone pattern, vibration and secret  
setting individually for each Contacts list entry.  
Note  
When the Mode Settings  
(page 209) is set to Silent, the  
ringtone does not play.  
1. In Step 3 of “Adding an Entry from the Main Menu” (page 79), select Sound/Secret  
and press  
.
@
2. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
External Light: Set the External Light colour for incoming calls. Select a colour  
Tip  
and press (Select).  
J
Ringtone Volume: Set the ringtone volume for incoming calls. Select a type,  
select Set and set the volume.  
Ringtones: Set the ringtone pattern for incoming calls or the ringtone duration for  
incoming messages. Proceed from Step 4 of “Personalising the Ringtone” (page  
211).  
If you select Same as Phone in  
Step 2, the sound settings will be  
the same as the corresponding  
settings of “Mode Settings” (page  
209). The external light setting  
will be the same as corresponding  
setting of “Setting the Incoming  
External Light” (page 228).  
Vibration: Set the vibration for incoming calls. Select a type and select a vibration  
pattern.  
Secret Setting: Allow the Contacts list entry to be displayed only if Secret mode  
(page 246) is set to On. Select either On or Off.  
3. Press (Back) once or twice to return to the Create Contact window.  
K
4. Press (Options).  
J
5. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
To save the entry, at least one of Last Name, First Name, Phone Number and Email  
needs to be set (page 79).  
Basic Operations  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Categories  
Your handset already has the following categories: Business Card, Private, Business,  
VIP, Colleague and Favourites. In addition, you can set your own categories. You  
can edit and set the options of categories. For each category, you can set the incoming  
external light, ringtone volume, ringtone pattern and vibration.  
Renaming a Category  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
Note  
2. Select Manage Category and press (Select).  
J
Preset categories cannot be  
renamed or deleted.  
3. Select a category and press  
.
@
4. Press (Options).  
J
5. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
6. Enter the category name and press  
.
@
To reset or delete a category, select  
a category after Step 2, press  
7. Select an icon and press (Select).  
J
(Options) and select Reset or  
Jj  
8. Press (Options).  
J
Delete.  
9. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
Setting Options for a Category  
1. After Step 3 of “Renaming a Category” (above), select Category Options and  
press  
Note  
.
@
The sound settings for individual  
entries (page 82) take priority over  
the option settings for a category.  
2. Proceed from Step 2 of “Setting the Ringtone & Other Settings” (page 82).  
The category options do not include Secret Setting.  
Basic Operations  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Groups  
Set the groups to use for MMS addresses. There are five groups and you can add up to  
ten members to each group. For details on using the Group list, see “Creating & Sending  
an MMS Message” (page 148).  
Adding a New Member to a Group  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Manage Group and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a group and press  
.
@
4. Select <Empty> and press (Options).  
J
5. Select Add and press (Select).  
J
6. Select Name and press  
.
@
7. Enter a name and press  
.
@
8. Select Send to and press  
.
@
9. Enter a phone number or email address and press  
.
@
10. Press (Options).  
J
11. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
Adding a New Group Member from the Contacts List  
Note  
1. After Step 4 of “Adding a New Member to a Group” (above), select Get Contacts  
and press (Select).  
J
Can be selected for a contact list  
that has the secret setting turned  
On when the secret mode (page  
246) is On.  
2. Select a member and press  
.
@
The details of the selected member appear.  
3. Select a phone number or email address and press  
.
@
Basic Operations  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Group Members  
1. After Step 3 of “Adding a New Member to a Group” (page 84), select a member and  
Tip  
press (Options).  
J
You can perform the following  
operations after Step 1.  
View: Displays the details of  
the member.  
Delete: Deletes the selected  
member.  
2. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an item and press  
.
@
4. Enter information and press  
.
@
5. Press (Options).  
J
6. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
Renaming a Group  
1. After Step 2 of “Adding a New Member to a Group” (page 84), select a group and  
Tip  
press (Options).  
J
To reset a group, select Reset  
after Step 1.  
2. Select Rename and press (Select).  
J
3. Enter the group name and press  
.
@
Basic Operations  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Contacts List  
Searching for an Entry in the Contacts List  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
7   
" Ì  i À Ã  
 
ä  ä 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8  
 
2. Select Contacts List and press (Select).  
J
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ˜ ` À i Ü Ê  > V  > À Ì  
 ˜ Ì  œ ˜ Þ Ê i ˜ ` i À Ã  
 Ã   i Þ  
3. Press (Options).  
J
4. Select Search Mode and press (Select).  
J
J
  ˆ  Þ  
5. Select a search mode and press (Select).  
  ˆ i  
" Ã >  Õ  
List View: Display the Contacts list.  
By 2-Touch: Convenient for searching Japanese names in Japanese language  
" « Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
Contacts List Window  
mode. For details, refer to the Japanese user manual.  
By Reading: Search an entry from the Reading field. Enter a letter to search  
names beginning with that letter.  
Tip  
• To display the Contacts list from  
standby mode, press  
• The selected search mode is  
used the next time you open  
the Contacts List.  
By Phone Number: Enter a number and press  
numbers containing the number you entered is displayed.  
. A list of entries with phone  
@
.
aB  
By Category: Select a category and press  
registered to that category is displayed.  
. A list of only the entries  
@
6. Select an entry and press  
to make a call to the default phone number.  
N
Basic Operations  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Call  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Contacts List and press (Select).  
J
To access the Web page, select  
the URL in the details window of  
3. Select a Contacts list entry and press  
.
@
the entry, press (Options) and  
Jj  
The details window of the entry appears.  
4. Select a phone number and press  
select Connect.  
.
N
To make a video call, press (Options), select Call and select Video Call.  
J
Sending a Message  
1. After Step 3 of “Making a Call” (above), select a phone number and press (Options).  
J
Tip  
2. Select Send Message and press (Select).  
J
If you selected an email address  
3. Select a message type and press (Select).  
J
in Step 1, press (Options) and  
Jj  
select Send MMS.  
SMS: Create an SMS message (page 159).  
MMS: Create an MMS message (page 148).  
Basic Operations  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Speed Calling  
Add up to nine phone numbers to the Speed Calling list for quick access to those  
numbers.  
Note  
• Only Contacts list entries in  
your handset can be added to  
the Speed Calling list.  
• Contact list entries with Secret  
Setting (page 82) set to On  
cannot be selected.  
Adding a Phone Number to the Speed Calling List  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Speed Calling and press (Select).  
J
The Speed Calling list appears.  
Tip  
4. Select <Empty> and press (Add).  
J
To delete an entry saved to the  
Speed Calling list, select the phone  
5. Select a Contacts list entry and press  
.
@
number after Step 3 and press  
(Delete).  
Jj  
Basic Operations  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Speed Calling to Make Calls  
1. In standby mode, enter a speed calling number.  
Tip  
2. Press  
.
N
• The speed calling number is  
indicated beside the entry in  
the Speed Calling list.  
• If the Contacts list entry in the  
Speed Calling list contains  
more than one phone number,  
a call is made to the default  
phone number (page 90).  
Using Send My vCard  
Convert the owner information appearing in My Details to vObject format (page 200) and  
send it by Bluetooth™.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Send My vCard and press (Select).  
J
Sends the information by Bluetooth™ (page 285).  
Basic Operations  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Contacts List Entries  
Tip  
You can set the following options  
after Step 7. The available options  
vary depending on the item  
selected.  
Edit and delete entries in the Contacts list.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Contacts List and press (Select).  
J
Edit: Re-edit the currently  
3. Select a Contacts list entry and press (Options).  
selected item.  
J
Select: Select the category,  
ringtone and other options.  
Change Picture: Change the  
picture.  
Change Type: Change the  
phone number, email address,  
postal address and URL type.  
4. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
The edit window appears.  
5. Select an item and press  
.
@
6. Edit the item and press  
.
@
7. Press (Options).  
J
Set to Default: If more than  
one phone number is saved to  
an entry, set a default phone  
number for that entry.  
8. Select the save method and press (Select).  
J
Save: Overwrite the original entry.  
Save as New: Save the edited entry as a new entry.  
Remove Picture: Delete the  
picture.  
Reset Settings: Reset the  
ringtone and other settings.  
Clear Field: Deletes the  
selected item.  
Clear Category: Clears the  
category setting.  
Clear Location: Clears the  
location information.  
Basic Operations  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options Available from the Contacts List  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) from the Contacts  
J
list.  
View: Display the details window for selected entry.  
Search Mode: Select a search mode (page 86).  
Create Contact: Add a new entry to the Contacts list.  
Edit: Edit entries.  
Delete: Delete one or all Contacts list entries.  
Select Multi: Select multiple entries to perform Delete, Copy, Move, Send vCard  
and View operations on multiple Contacts list entries.  
Send vCard: Send an entry in vCard format. You can select the send method.  
Memory Card: View Contacts list entries saved to a memory card.  
Phone/USIM: View Contacts list entries saved to the handset and USIM card.  
Sort by: Change the entry order by item. You can select a sort option from  
Birthday or Reading.  
Basic Operations  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Contacts List  
Setting the Default Storage Place  
Preset the default storage place for new Contacts list entries.  
An indicator (  
/
/
) at the top of the Contacts list window (page 86) indicates the  
storage place of the Contacts list entry.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Default Storage and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a default storage place and press (Select).  
J
Always Ask: Select the storage place each time you save a new entry.  
Phone Memory: Save all new entries to the handset Contacts.  
USIM: Save all new entries to the USIM Contacts.  
Memory Card: Save all new entries to a memory card.  
Setting the Scroll Speed  
Set the speed for scrolling up and down in the Contacts list.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Scroll Speed and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Fast or Slow and press (Select).  
J
Basic Operations  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prohibiting Use of the Contacts List  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
Note  
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
If Phonebook Lock is set to On,  
speed calling cannot be used to  
make calls.  
3. Select Phonebook Lock and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On and press (Select).  
J
5. Enter your security code (page 54).  
Tip  
If Phonebook Lock is set to On and  
you want to use the Contacts list,  
enter your security code (page 54)  
to temporarily cancel the setting.  
Basic Operations  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contacts Memory Status  
Check the number of Contacts list entries saved in your handset, USIM card and  
memory card.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Memory Status and press (Select).  
J
Owner Information  
Display and edit owner information such as the phone number and email address of  
your handset.  
Tip  
You can also display owner  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
information if you press  
in  
@a  
2. Select My Details and press (Select).  
J
standby mode and then press  
.
0/  
The owner information appears.  
If you select Send vCard after  
Step 3, you can send your own  
phone number by MMS. You  
can also send your own number  
using Bluetooth™ (page 285).  
3. Press (Options).  
J
4. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
Perform Steps 3 and 4 of “Adding an Entry from the Main Menu” (page 79).  
Basic Operations  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media Player  
Media Player enables playback and streaming of video/audio files. Media Player supports 3GPP,  
3GPP2, MP3 and MP4 file format.  
In this Chapter  
Media Player Menu  
Playback Window  
Playing Music & Videos  
Using Playlists  
Other Operations & Settings  
Music Player  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media Player Menu  
1. In standby mode, press  
.
H
Tip  
The Media Player menu appears.  
2. Use to select Music tab ( ), Video tab ( ) or Streaming tab ( ).  
The number appearing to the right  
of an item indicates the number of  
playlists or files for that item.  
F
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Music tab ( )  
Download Music: Start browser and connect to a download site.  
Playlists: Create a playlist and play music files.  
Beat Engine Box: Access tracks transferred from a PC to a memory card. All music  
files transferred from a PC (page 289) using the music transfer software are stored  
here. The list displays tracks by artist or album, or all tracks at once.  
My Sounds: Access files in the Melody&Music folder of Data folder.  
Recent: Display the 20 most recent tracks played by Media Player and Music  
Player (page 103).  
Video tab (  
)
Download Videos: Start browser and connect to a download site.  
My Videos: Access files in the Videos folder of Data folder.  
Recent: Display the 20 most recent video files played by Media Player.  
Streaming tab ( )  
Enter URL: Connect to the network and stream content.  
Bookmarks: Stream content from a bookmarked URL.  
Recent: Display up to the last 20 URLs streamed.  
Media Player  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback Window  
File number/total number of files  
Title or file name  
Artist name  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
ä
ä
ä
£
É
ä
ä
ä
n
/ ˆ Ì  i £  
 À Ì ˆ Ã Ì £  
Progress bar  
:
:
:
:
ä
ä
ä
Î
£
Ó
ä
ä
£
ä
Ó
Î
Elapsed playback time  
Total playback time  
Playback status  
Help guidance  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
Play mode  
Music File Playback Window  
Bass  
Playback volume  
Video Display  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
6
ˆ ` i œ £ É  À Ì ˆ Ã Ì  
ä
ä
ä
£
É
ä
ä
ä
n
:
:
:
:
ä
ä
Ó
Î
Î
ä
É
ä
£
ä
Ó
ä
Î
«
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
- Ì œ  
Video File Playback Window  
Media Player  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Music & Videos  
1. In standby mode, press  
.
H
Note  
The Media Player menu appears.  
Music Player is not activated when  
playing a music file from Recent.  
2. Use to switch to the Music tab or Video tab, select Playlists, Beat Engine  
F
Box, My Sounds, My Videos or Recent and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a playlist or a file within a folder and press  
.
@
Tip  
Playback begins.  
To use Music Player (page 103), close the handset while playing music files.  
To start the browser and connect  
to a file download site, select  
Download Music or Download  
Videos in Step 2.  
Operations During Playback  
Adjust volume: Press  
or / .  
P Q  
G
@
Tip  
Pause/resume: Press  
.
When  
appears in the  
Rewind/Forward: Press and hold  
/
.
D C  
or  
playback window, press  
to  
1/  
Play previous/next file: Press  
* # D C  
Rewind/Forward video frame by frame (only when an MP4 video is paused): Press  
/
/
.
display the operation guide.  
/
.
D C  
Media Player  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching Play Modes  
You can switch to any of the following play modes if you press (Options) while a track  
is playing/paused and select Play Mode.  
J
Note  
This operation is not possible  
for the playback of tracks from  
Recent.  
Repeat ( ): Play the current track repeatedly.  
Repeat All ( ): Play all files in the current playlist or folder repeatedly.  
Random ( ): Play all files in the current playlist or folder randomly.  
Current Only ( ): Play the current track once only.  
All ( ): Play all files in the current playlist or folder in order.  
Switching to Background Playback  
You can switch to background playback in order to use other functions if you press  
while a track is playing/paused. The indicator appears on the display during  
background playback.  
H
To redisplay the playback window, display the standby window during background  
playback and press  
.
H
Streaming  
The streaming function allows you to play the video/audio files of links. You can access  
Web pages for streaming from Enter URL (page 96) on the Streaming tab or stream  
from links in messages and Web pages.  
Note  
Packet communication fees apply  
even if playback is paused  
because the handset continues  
network communication.  
Media Player  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Playlists  
Creating a Playlist  
You can create up to ten playlists in your handset. You can also create up to ten playlists  
in a memory card. Each playlist can contain up to 50 tracks. This feature allows you to  
create a list of files that you want to play as a set. You can also change the playback  
order of files in a playlist.  
1. In standby mode, press  
.
H
The Media Player menu appears.  
2. Use to switch to the Music tab.  
F
3. Select Playlists and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Phone Memory or Memory Card and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Create Playlist and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter a playlist name and press  
.
@
7. Select Beat Engine Box, My Sounds or Recent and press (Select).  
J
8. Select a track and press  
.
@
A check mark is added to the check box.  
To add another file, repeat Step 8.  
9. Press (Options).  
J
10. Select Add to Playlist and press (Select).  
J
Media Player  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Playlist  
You can add new tracks to a playlist you have already created, as well as change the  
playback order and delete tracks.  
Tip  
• To rename a playlist, select the  
1. After Step 4 of “Creating a Playlist” (page 100), select a playlist and press  
J
playlist, press (Options) and  
Jj  
(Options).  
select Rename.  
2. Select Open and press (Select).  
• After Step 2, to check the  
details of a track, select the  
J
The tracks in the playlist appear.  
track, press (Options) and  
Jj  
select Details.  
3. Press (Options).  
J
4. Select Manage Playlist and press (Select).  
J
Add Tracks: After you select the tracks to add, press J (Options) and select Add  
to Playlist. To select or unselect tracks, select a track with the cursor and press  
or press J (Options) and select Mark/Unmark or Mark All/Unmark All.  
@
Remove Tracks: After you select the tracks to remove, press (Options) and  
J
select Delete. To select or unselect tracks, select a track with the cursor and  
press  
All.  
or press J (Options) and select Mark/Unmark or Mark All/Unmark  
@
Change Order: Select a track and press  
. Use  
to select the position to  
@
G
which to move the track and press  
.
@
Using My Favourites  
My Favourites is a preinstalled playlist. To add a track, press and hold during  
H
playback. You can also save the contents of My Favourites as a regular playlist if you  
select My Favourites after selecting Phone Memory in Step 4 of “Creating a Playlist”  
(page 100), press (Options) and select Save as. However, doing so will delete the  
J
tracks from My Favourites.  
Media Player  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Operations & Settings  
Media Player Settings  
1. In standby mode, press  
.
@
The main menu appears.  
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Media Player Set and press (Select).  
J
Priority Setting: If Incoming Call is set, playback pauses when a call is received  
and you are notified of the call. If Playback is set, playback is not paused when a  
call is received and you are notified of the call.  
Backlight: Set whether the backlight is lit during playback.  
Media Player  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music Player  
Use Music Player to navigate Media Player with your handset closed. Play tracks and  
adjust volume using the Music Player keys and remote control keys.  
Playback Window  
Title or file name  
Artist name  
£
ä
Ó
\
Î
ä
    6ODAFONE 3ONG  
    6ODAFONE  
    6ODAFONE  
Album name  
Playback status  
Progress bar  
0 , ! 9  
 
:
:
:
:
ä
ä
ä
ä
Ó
ä
ä
ä
ä
x
ä
Elapsed playback time/total playback time  
Playback Window  
Activating/Playing Music Player  
End all operations and close the phone before activating Music Player.  
Tip  
1. Press  
from standby mode.  
W
• You can press and hold  
to  
Xt  
The Music Player menu appears.  
start Music Player. However, the  
playback window displayed last  
time appears if a file was being  
played the last time Music  
2. Select Playlists, Beat Engine Box, My Sounds or Recent and press  
(Select).  
(Select).  
V
V
Use  
or  
to select an item in the Music Player menu and press  
W
X
Player or Media Player ended.  
3. Select a track and press  
(Select).  
V
Playback begins.  
To select another track, press  
without ending playback.  
during playback. You can display the menu  
W
Media Player  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating During Playing  
Adjusts the playback volume: Press / .  
P Q  
X
Pauses/resumes playback: Press  
.
Rewinds/Forwards the track: Press and hold  
/
.
U V  
Plays the next track: Press  
.
V
Rewinds the current track to the beginning/Plays the previous track: Press  
.
U
Ends Music Player: Press and hold  
.
X
Switching Play Modes  
You can switch the play mode in sequence each time you press and hold  
while a  
W
Note  
track is playing or paused. For details on play modes, see page 99.  
This operation is not possible  
for the playback of tracks from  
Recent.  
Media Player  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Call  
In This Chapter  
About Video Calls  
Making a Video Call  
Answering a Video Call  
Convenient Functions for Video Calls  
Video Call Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Video Calls  
A video call enables two parties with video call compatible handsets to send images to  
each other while they talk.  
Note  
• A video call is only possible  
in areas with 3G-network  
coverage.  
Indicators  
• The video call function of  
your handset complies with  
the 3G-324M international  
standard for 3G mobile  
videophones.  
• The 705T does not allow  
parties to look at the face of the  
other party while talking.  
The following indicators appear during video calls.  
3G Area  
Video Call  
Mute  
Mute My Voice  
Mute All  
Image Quality  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
Motion Prioritised  
Standard Mode  
Macro Mode  
Ê 6 ˆ ` i œ Ê  >    
 
Handsfree On  
ä ä \ ä £ \ Ó Î  
Handsfree  
Handsfree (Bluetooth™ connection)  
Image Transfer Off  
Sending Picture  
Voice Connection Established  
Video Connection Established  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
Video Call Window  
Video Call  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Video Call  
1. In standby mode, confirm that the indicator for indicating you are in an area with  
Note  
3G-network coverage is displayed.  
If a video call connection could  
not be established, a message  
appears and a warning tone plays.  
To make a voice call instead, press  
2. Enter a phone number and press (Options).  
J
3. Select Video Call and press (Select).  
J
The sound automatically switches from the earpiece to the speaker.  
(Yes).  
Jj  
4. Press  
to end the call.  
O
Tip  
You can also make a video call  
from the Contacts list (page 86) or  
call log (page 59).  
Video Call  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answering a Video Call  
When a video call is received, the ringtone plays, the external light flashes and “Video  
Call” appears on the display.  
Tip  
• To perform the following  
operations, use same  
1. Press when a video call is received.  
N
procedures used for voice calls:  
Rejecting calls (pages 56, 243),  
diverting calls (page 65), Any  
Key Answer (page 239) and  
Open to Answer (page 239).  
The sound automatically switches from the earpiece to the speaker. However, if the  
phone profile (page 209) is set to Silent when a video call is received, the caller’s  
voice is heard from the earpiece. To switch the sound from the earpiece to the  
speaker, press  
(
) during a call.  
K
2. Press  
to end the call.  
• To place an incoming call on  
O
hold, press (Options) and  
Jj  
select Hold. To answer a  
call placed on hold, press  
(Unhold).  
Jj  
Video Call  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions for Video Calls  
The following convenient functions are available during calls.  
Placing a Call on Hold  
Place a call on hold. While on hold, voice guidance notifies the other party that he/she  
has been placed on hold. The other party is also sent the picture preset for the Hold  
Guidance setting (page 115).  
1. Press (Hold) during a call.  
J
To resume a call placed on hold, press (Unhold).  
J
Adjusting the Speaker Volume  
Adjust the speaker volume during a call.  
Tip  
1. Press a side key ( / ) during a call.  
P Q  
If you have switched the sound to  
the earpiece (page 110), you can  
use this procedure to adjust the  
volume of the earpiece.  
2. Use  
or side keys ( / ) to adjust the volume.  
P Q  
G
Turning On/Off the Outgoing Voice  
Turn on/off the outgoing voice during a call. To turn off the outgoing voice, press  
C
during a call. To turn the outgoing voice back on, press  
again.  
C
Video Call  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Mute  
Mute the incoming voice and outgoing voice during a call.  
Tip  
1. Press (Options) during a call.  
J
To cancel mute, press (Unmute).  
Jj  
2. Select Mute and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Mute My Voice: Mute the outgoing voice.  
Mute All: Mute both the outgoing and incoming voice.  
Switching between the Earpiece & Speaker  
Switch between the earpiece and speaker during a call. To switch between the earpiece  
and speaker, press  
(
) or  
(
) during a call.  
K
K
Using Zoom  
To use the zoom, press  
during a call.  
G
Note  
Zoom is unavailable while you are  
sending a picture (page 112).  
Video Call  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching Screen Display  
Select the screen display method during a call.  
1. Press (Options) during a call.  
J
2. Select Screen Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Switch Screens and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a display method and press (Select).  
J
Priority Incoming: Display a large incoming image and a small outgoing image.  
Incoming Only: Display only the incoming image.  
Priority Outgoing: Display a small incoming image and a large outgoing image.  
Outgoing Only: Display only the outgoing image.  
Outgoing Picture  
Change the picture being sent to the other party during a call. Pressing  
between the camera image and preinstalled picture.  
switches  
D
Video Call  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Picture  
Send a picture in Data Folder during a call.  
1. Press (Options) during a call.  
J
2. Select Screen Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Sending Picture and press (Select).  
J
4. Select My Pictures and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a picture and press  
.
@
6. Use  
to trim the picture and press  
.
@
E
7. Check the picture and press (OK).  
J
To cancel, press (Stop).  
K
Setting the Image Quality  
Set the quality and motion speed of the incoming video.  
1. Press (Options) during a call.  
J
2. Select Screen Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Image Quality and press (Select).  
J
4. Select the output format and press (Select).  
J
Motion Prioritised: Give priority to video motion.  
Standard Mode: Standard output format.  
Macro Mode: Give priority to image quality.  
Video Call  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Call Settings  
Setting the Outgoing Image  
Preset the outgoing image to send during a video call.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Video Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Outgoing Video and press (Select).  
J
5. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Camera Monitored: Send video images recorded during a call.  
My Pictures: Select a picture to send from the Pictures folder of Data Folder.  
Select a picture press  
and then press (Set).  
@
J
No Picture: Send a preinstalled picture in your handset.  
Video Call  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Auto Answer for Video Calls  
When the Auto Answer function for video calls is set, video calls received from phone  
numbers in the Auto Answer list (below) are answered automatically without having to  
press a key.  
Note  
• The Auto Answer function for  
incoming video calls is only  
available while your handset is  
open. Incoming video calls are  
received as usual when your  
handset is closed.  
1. After Step 3 of “Setting the Outgoing Image” (page 113), select Auto Answer and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select Mode Settings and press (Select).  
• If a video call is received  
from a phone number in the  
Auto Answer list while Auto  
Answer is set to On, the Auto  
Answer tone plays and the  
call is answered automatically  
regardless of the mode settings  
(page 209).  
J
3. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Adding a Phone Number to the Auto Answer List for Video Calls  
You can add up to ten phone numbers to the Auto Answer list. When a video call is  
received from a number saved in Auto Answer list, the call is automatically answered.  
1. After Step 3 of “Setting the Outgoing Image” (page 113), select Auto Answer and  
Tip  
press (Select).  
J
To check, edit or delete the phone  
number, select the phone number  
and press (Options) after  
2. Select Auto Answer List and press (Select).  
J
Jj  
3. Press (Add).  
J
Step 2.  
4. Enter your security code (page 54).  
5. Select a phone number input method and press (Select).  
J
From Phonebook: Select a phone number from the Contacts list (page 86).  
Set Number: Directly enter a phone number.  
From Call Log: Select a phone number from the call log (page 59).  
To add a second or subsequent phone number, press (Options) after Step 2.  
J
Then, select Add and proceed from Step 4.  
Video Call  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Backlight  
Set whether the backlight is lit during a video call.  
1. After Step 3 of “Setting the Outgoing Image” (page 113), select Backlight and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Hold Guidance Settings  
You can set the picture displayed to the other party when you place an incoming video  
call or video call in progress on hold.  
1. After Step 3 of “Setting the Outgoing Image” (page 113), select Hold Guidance and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Hold Answer: Set the hold guidance for incoming calls.  
Hold during Call: Set the hold guidance for calls in progress.  
3. Select an image type and press (Select).  
J
Preset Picture: Set the default picture.  
My Pictures: Select a picture from the Pictures folder of Data Folder. Select a  
picture press  
and then press (Set).  
@
J
Video Call  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera/Video Camera  
You can take pictures and record videos and then save them, attach them to messages and  
display them on a TV. You can also edit pictures.  
In This Chapter  
Camera  
Pictures  
Videos  
Picture & Video Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera  
You can use the camera to take pictures and record videos, as well as to scan QR codes  
(page 274).  
Modes  
Modes for Taking Pictures  
Digital Camera: Take high-quality pictures at W640×H480 size or higher  
resolution.  
Mobile Camera: Take pictures at W240×H320 size or smaller for use as  
wallpaper, etc.  
Scanner: Scan QR codes. For details, see “Barcode” (page 274).  
Modes for Recording Videos  
Camcorder: Record videos at W320×H240 size. Allows you to record videos  
up to 20 minutes long. The recording time depends on the amount of available  
memory in the storage place.  
For MMS: Record videos at W176×H144 size. Attach videos recorded in this  
mode to MMS messages.  
Short Video: Record videos at W128×H96 size. Use this mode for sending video  
attachments to MPEG-4 compatible Vodafone handsets (PDC).  
Camera/Video Camera  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicators  
②③④⑤  
Camera Indicators  
-AXIMUM  
.UMBER OF  
0ICTURES  
0195  
Camera Mode/Multi Shots:  
:OOM "AR  
Digital Camera, Mobile Camera, Scanner,  
%XPOSURE  
#ONTROL "AR  
Multi Shots (High Speed), (Normal Speed), (Low Speed)  
Picture Size:  
W1280 × H960, W640 × H480,  
W240 × H320, W144 × H176,  
W120 × H160, W112 × H112,  
W96 × H128  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
⑨⑩⑪  
Camera Finding Window  
Picture Quality: Fine, Normal, Economy  
Night Mode: On  
Camera/Video Camera  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
⑬⑭④⑤⑩⑯  
Video Camera Indicators  
Video Mode: Video Mode  
Video Size: W320 × H240, W176 × H144, W128 × H96  
Video Quality: Fine, Normal, Economy  
Status:  
:OOM "AR  
%XPOSURE  
#ONTROL "AR  
2ECORDING  
4IME  
2ECORDING  
0ROGRESS "AR  
ä
ä
Ã
É
x
ä
Ã
Standby,  
Forward,  
Recording,  
Rewind,  
Stopped,  
Playing, Paused,  
Frame Rewind  
Frame Forward,  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
Voice Record Off  
⑧⑨  
Video Finding Window  
Camera & Video Camera Indicators  
Exposure Control: ... ... -6.0 ... 0 ...+6.0  
Storage Place: Phone, Memory Card  
Delay Timer: 5 sec., 10 sec., 20 sec.  
Guide Display  
White Balance:  
Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent (Day), Fluorescent (Wht),  
Tungsten  
Colour Control: Intense Colour, Soft Colour  
Mobile Light  
Camera/Video Camera  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Images on a Television  
You can view pictures/videos on a TV. The TV systems supported by your handset are the  
NTSC and PAL systems. The SECAM system is not supported. For details, see “Displaying  
Files on a TV” (page 198).  
Confirming the Memory Status  
Confirm the usage status of your handset and a memory card.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Camera and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Memory Status and press (Select).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pictures  
Taking a Picture  
There are two modes for taking pictures: Digital Camera and Mobile Camera (page 117).  
You can also edit the pictures you take and set them for Contacts list entries (page 131).  
Tip  
• If the Preview setting (page  
142) is set to On, you can  
preview the image after it has  
been saved.  
• If the picture was taken in  
Digital Camera mode, you can  
enlarge or reduce the captured  
1. In standby mode, press the side key ( ).  
R
2. Frame the subject and press  
or a side key ( ).  
@
R
The shutter clicks and the picture is saved automatically to the preset storage place  
(page 140).  
The preview window appears.  
image using  
.
Ga  
• To capture another image,  
Deleting a Picture  
Delete the picture displayed after capturing image.  
press (Back) after capturing  
image.  
Kk  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image.  
J
• To set the Full Screen setting  
after capturing image,  
2. Select Delete and press  
.
@
press (Options) and select  
Jj  
3. Press (Yes).  
J
Full Screen.  
Camera/Video Camera  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Send Functions  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image.  
J
2. Select Send and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a send method and press (Select).  
J
As MMS: Send the picture attached to an MMS message (page 148).  
Via Bluetooth: Send the picture by Bluetooth™ (page 285).  
Key Operations  
Adjust the exposure and zoom before capturing image. To adjust the exposure, press  
to make the picture darker and press  
to make the picture lighter. To adjust the  
D
C
zoom, press  
out.  
or a side key ( ) to zoom in and press  
or a side key ( ) to zoom  
A
P
B
Q
Picture Sizes  
The picture sizes for Digital Camera mode and Mobile Camera mode are as follows.  
For details on setting the picture size, see “Changing the Picture Size” (page 136).  
Digital Camera: Select a picture size from W1280 × H960 and W640 × H480.  
Mobile Camera: Select a picture size from W240 × H320,  
W144 × H176, W120 × H160, W112 × H112 and W96 × H128.  
Viewing a Picture  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image.  
J
2. Select My Pictures and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a picture and press  
.
@
Camera/Video Camera  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions for Taking Pictures  
Switching Camera Modes  
For details on camera modes, see “Modes for Taking Pictures” (page 117).  
Tip  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image, select Camera Mode and press  
J
J
For details on changing the picture  
size in Digital Camera and Mobile  
Camera, see page 136.  
(Select).  
2. Select Digital Camera, Mobile Camera or Scanner and press (Select).  
J
Night Mode  
You can use this mode for taking pictures at night, etc. You can set night mode to On to  
reduce noise while you are taking pictures.  
Note  
• If night mode is set, multi  
shots cannot be used with high  
speed.  
• If night mode is set, white  
balance (page 141) and colour  
control (page 141) cannot be  
used.  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image, select Night Mode and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi Shots  
Take nine pictures in succession.  
Note  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image, select Multi Shots and press (Select).  
J
J
• Multi shots is unavailable  
for taking pictures in Digital  
Camera mode.  
• If night mode is set, multi  
shots cannot be used with high  
speed.  
2. Select High Speed, Normal Speed, Low Speed or Off and press (Select).  
J
To delete a picture taken while multi shots is set, press (Options), select Delete,  
J
select the picture, press  
Delete.  
to add a check mark, press (Options) and select  
@
J
• Zoom is unavailable while multi  
shots is set.  
Frame Setting  
You can select a frame before you take a picture. For details on setting a frame  
afterwards, see page 127.  
Note  
When taking pictures in Digital  
Camera mode or at the W96 × H128  
size, a frame cannot be set.  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image, select Add Frame and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select Preset Frames, My Pictures or Off and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a frame from the list and press  
.
@
The frame appears before capturing image.  
Press or to display the previous frame and press  
or  
to display the  
D
*
C
#
next frame.  
4. Press (OK).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Functions for Taking Pictures  
Delay Timer (page 140)  
Mobile Light (page 140)  
White Balance (page 141)  
Colour Control (page 141)  
Exposure Control (page 142)  
Camera/Video Camera  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Picture  
You can edit the picture after capturing image using Mobile Camera or pictures saved  
to Data Folder (page 193). You can edit any picture saved in JPEG or PNG format with a  
file size up to 100 KB and a picture size up to W240 × H320. Pictures taken in Digital  
Camera mode can only be saved as thumbnails.  
Changing the Picture Size  
Change the sizes of the pictures you take.  
Tip  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image, select Edit Picture and press (Select).  
J
J
You can perform the following  
operations if you press (Options)  
For a picture saved to Data Folder (page 193), select Advanced and press  
(Select).  
J
Jj  
after Step 3.  
Cut: Trims the image to fit the  
2. Select Picture Size and press (Select).  
J
selected picture size.  
3. Select a picture size or Define and press (Select).  
J
Fit to Width: Resizes the  
picture to fit the width of the  
selected picture size.  
Fit to Length: Resizes the  
picture to fit the height of the  
selected picture size.  
A rectangle frame indicates the picture size.  
If you selected Define, enter a picture size (W16 to 240 × H16 to 320) and press  
(OK).  
J
4. Use  
to adjust the position of the picture within the dotted line and press  
.
@
E
5. Press (OK) and  
.
@
J
6. Select a save method and press (Select).  
J
Save: Overwrite the file of the original picture.  
Save as: Save the picture as a new file. Enter a file name and press  
.
@
Camera/Video Camera  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a Frame  
Add frames to the pictures you take. You can select a frame from preinstalled frames or  
frames saved to Data Folder.  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image, select Edit Picture and press (Select).  
J
J
For a picture saved to Data Folder (page 193), select Advanced and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select Add Frame and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Preset Frames or My Pictures and press (Select).  
J
If you selected Preset Frames, select a frame size and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a frame and press  
.
@
The framed picture appears.  
If the frame size is smaller than the picture size, you can use  
position of the frame.  
to adjust the  
E
To switch to another frame, press  
or  
.
#
*
5. Press (OK) and  
.
@
J
6. Select a save method and press (Select).  
J
Save: Overwrite the file of the original picture.  
Save as: Save the picture as a new file. Enter a file name and press  
.
@
Camera/Video Camera  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a Stamp  
Paste stamps on the pictures you take. You can select a stamp from preinstalled stamps  
or stamps saved to Data Folder.  
Tip  
• To paste the same stamp again,  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image, select Edit Picture and press (Select).  
J
J
press (Options) after Step 5  
Jj  
and select Continue.  
For a picture saved to Data Folder (page 193), select Advanced and press  
(Select).  
J
• To undo the pasting of a stamp,  
press (Options) after Step 5  
Jj  
2. Select Add Stamp and press (Select).  
J
and select Undo All.  
3. Select Preset Stamps or My Pictures and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a stamp and press  
.
@
To switch to another stamp, press  
or  
.
#
*
5. Use  
to adjust the paste position and press  
.
@
E
6. Press  
twice.  
@
7. Select a save method and press (Select).  
J
Save: Overwrite the file of the original picture.  
Save as: Save the picture as a new file. Enter a file name and press  
.
@
Camera/Video Camera  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Text  
Add text to the pictures you take.  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image, select Edit Picture and press (Select).  
J
J
For a picture saved to Data Folder (page 193), select Advanced and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select Add Text and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Large Font, Standard Font or Small Font and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a font colour and press (Select).  
J
5. Enter text and press  
.
@
You can enter up to 9 characters with the large font, 12 characters with the  
standard font and 20 characters with the small font.  
6. Use  
to adjust the paste position and press (Paste).  
E
J
7. Press  
.
@
8. Select a save method and press (Select).  
J
Save: Overwrite the file of the original picture.  
Save as: Save the picture as a new file. Enter a file name and press  
.
@
Camera/Video Camera  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotating a Picture  
Rotate and then save the pictures you take.  
1. Press (Options) after capturing image, select Edit Picture and press (Select).  
J
J
For a picture saved to Data Folder (page 193), select Advanced and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select Rotate Image and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an angle and press (Select).  
J
90 degrees: Rotate the picture 90 degrees clockwise.  
180 degrees: Rotate the picture 180 degrees.  
270 degrees: Rotate the picture 270 degrees clockwise (90 degrees  
anticlockwise).  
4. Press (OK) and  
.
@
J
5. Select a save method and press (Select).  
J
Save: Overwrite the file of the original picture.  
Save as: Save the picture as a new file. Enter a file name and press  
.
@
Saving Thumbnails  
Save pictures taken in Digital Camera mode as thumbnails. Pictures saved as  
thumbnails can be attached to messages.  
Note  
Some pictures may not be able to  
be saved as pictures that can be  
attached to messages.  
1. Open a picture and press (Options).  
J
2. Select Save Thumbnail and press (Select).  
J
The thumbnail is saved automatically to the Pictures folder of Data Folder.  
Camera/Video Camera  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving to a Contact Entry  
Register a picture taken in Mobile Camera mode at the W112 × H112 size  
(pages 122, 136) to a Contacts list entry.  
1. Take a picture at the W112 × H112 size, press (Options) after capturing image,  
J
select Assign to Contact and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Add New Contact and press (Select).  
J
To add the picture to an existing Contacts list entry, select Add to Existing.  
3. Proceed from Step 3 of “Adding an Entry from the Main Menu” (page 79).  
Camera/Video Camera  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Videos  
Recording a Video  
Use the camera to record videos. There are three modes for recording videos:  
Camcorder, For MMS and Short Video (page 117).  
Note  
If the recording mode is set to For  
MMS or Short Video, recording  
cannot be paused.  
1. In standby mode, press and hold the side key ( ).  
R
2. Display the subject and press  
or a side key ( ).  
@
R
The start sound is heard and recording begins.  
In Camcorder mode, press to pause recording and  
resume recording.  
or a side key ( ) to  
J
@
R
Tip  
If the Preview setting (page 142)  
is set to On, the first frame of  
the video appears after recording  
a video.  
3. Press  
or a side key ( ).  
@
R
The end sound is heard and the video is saved automatically to the preset storage  
place (page 140).  
The preview window appears.  
To record another video, press  
(Back) after recording the  
Kk  
first video.  
• To set a video as the incoming  
ringtone (page 82), press  
(Options) from the preview  
window after recording ends  
and select Assign to Contact.  
Only videos recorded in For  
MMS and Short Video can be  
set as an incoming ringtone.  
Deleting a Video  
1. Press (Options) after recording a video.  
J
Jj  
2. Select Delete and press  
.
@
3. Press (Yes).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Send Functions  
1. Press (Options) after recording a video.  
J
Note  
2. Select Send and press (Select).  
J
• Videos recorded in Camcorder  
cannot be sent.  
3. Select a send method and press (Select).  
J
• If the Preview setting (page  
142) is set to Off, the video  
cannot be sent from the  
preview window.  
As MMS: Send the video by attaching an MMS message (page 148).  
Via Bluetooth: Send the video by Bluetooth™ (page 285).  
Key Operations  
Adjust the exposure before recording a video. You can also adjust the zoom before or  
during recording. To adjust the exposure, press  
to make the video darker and press  
D
to make the video lighter. To adjust the zoom, press  
or a side key ( ) to zoom  
C
A
P
in and press  
or a side key ( ) to zoom out.  
B
Q
Video Sizes  
Camcorder: Record at the W320 × H240 video size.  
For MMS: Record at the W176 × H144 video size.  
Short Video: Record at the W128 × H96 video size.  
Camera/Video Camera  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing a Video  
1. Press (Options) before recording a video.  
J
Note  
2. Select My Videos and press (Select).  
J
The forward, rewind, frame  
forward, frame rewind and slow  
playback features are unavailable  
for videos recorded in For MMS or  
Short Video.  
3. Select a video and press  
.
@
Press and hold  
video.  
to forward the video and press and hold  
to rewind the  
C
D
Press  
or a side key ( ) to increase the playback volume and press  
or a  
A
P
B
side key ( ) to decrease the playback volume.  
Q
Tip  
To pause a video during playback,  
press  
paused, press  
forward, press and hold  
. When a video is  
a@  
for frame  
Ca  
for  
Ca  
slow playback and press  
frame rewind.  
for  
aD  
Camera/Video Camera  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions for Recording Videos  
Switching Record Modes  
For details on record modes, see “Modes for Recording Videos” (page 117).  
1. Press (Options) before recording a video, select Record Mode and press  
J
J
J
(Select).  
2. Select Camcorder, For MMS or Short Video and press (Select).  
J
Recording Sound  
1. Press (Options) before recording a video, select Voice Record and press  
J
(Select).  
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Setting the Video Compression Method  
Set the compression method for videos recorded in For MMS mode.  
1. Press (Options) before recording a video, select Advanced and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select Video Encode and press (Select).  
J
3. Select MPEG4(Japan) or H.263(Europe) and press (Select).  
J
Additional Functions for Recording Videos  
Delay Timer (page 140)  
Mobile Light (page 140)  
White Balance (page 141)  
Colour Control (page 141)  
Exposure Control (page 142)  
Camera/Video Camera  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture & Video Settings  
Settings for Taking Pictures  
Changing the Picture Quality  
Change the picture quality for camera modes.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Camera and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Camera Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Picture Settings and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Picture Quality and press (Select).  
J
6. Select Fine, Normal or Economy and press (Select).  
J
Changing the Picture Size  
1. After Step 4 of “Changing the Picture Quality” (above), select Picture Size and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select Digital Camera or Mobile Camera and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a picture size and press (Select).  
J
For details on picture sizes, see page 122.  
Camera/Video Camera  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date Stamp  
Add a date stamp to pictures.  
Note  
1. After Step 4 of “Changing the Picture Quality” (page 136), select Date Stamp and  
When taking pictures in Digital  
Camera mode or at the W112 ×  
H112 size, a date stamp cannot be  
added.  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select On and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a date colour and press (Select).  
J
Displaying a Grid  
Display horizontal and vertical gridlines on the monitor window to use as a vertical and  
horizontal guide for taking pictures.  
1. After Step 3 of “Changing the Picture Quality” (page 136), select Grid and press  
J
(Select).  
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Shutter Sound  
Set the shutter sound.  
Note  
1. After Step 3 of “Changing the Picture Quality” (page 136), select Shutter Sound  
The shutter sound is heard even  
if Silent is set for the Mode  
Settings (page 209). Furthermore,  
the volume of the shutter sound  
cannot be adjusted.  
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 and press  
.
@
Camera/Video Camera  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings for Recording Videos  
Changing the Video Quality  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Camera and press (Select).  
@
J
Note  
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
The maximum recording time varies  
depending on the video quality  
setting.  
3. Select Video Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
4. Select Movie Settings and press (Select).  
5. Select Video Quality and press (Select).  
J
6. Select Fine, Normal or Economy and press (Select).  
J
Switching Image to Full Display  
Use the full display to view images.  
Tip  
1. After Step 3 of “Changing the Video Quality” (above), select Screen Settings and  
To set the Full Screen setting after  
recording a video, press  
(Options) and select Full Screen.  
press (Select).  
J
Jj  
2. Select Screen Display and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Normal or Full Screen and press (Select).  
J
Display Indicators  
Set display indicators on or off.  
1. After Step 3 of “Changing the Video Quality” (above), select Screen Settings and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select Controller Display and press (Select).  
J
3. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Start & End Sounds  
Set the start and end sounds.  
Note  
1. After Step 3 of “Changing the Video Quality” (page 138), select Start/End Sounds  
The Start/End sounds are heard  
even if Silent is set for the Mode  
Settings (page 209). Furthermore,  
the volume of the Start/End sounds  
cannot be adjusted.  
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 and press  
.
@
Settings for Pictures & Videos  
Using Macro Lens  
Attach the macro lens to read QR codes (page 274). Remove the cover and hold the  
macro lens near the camera's lens until the magnet pulls them together. Pull the macro  
lens lightly to remove it.  
Camera/Video Camera  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage Place  
Set the storage places to which to automatically save pictures and videos.  
Note  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image or recording a video, select Save Image  
J
All pictures taken in Digital Camera  
mode are saved to the Digital  
Camera folder.  
to or Save Video to and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Phone Memory or Memory Card and press (Select).  
J
If more than one folder is available for selection as the storage place, select a folder  
and press (Select).  
J
Delay Timer  
This feature allows you to take a picture or start recording after a specified time elapses.  
Note  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image or recording a video, select Advanced  
J
The exposure and zoom cannot be  
adjusted when the delay timer is  
activated.  
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Delay Timer and press (Select).  
J
3. Select 5 sec, 10 sec, 20 sec or Off and press (Select).  
J
Mobile Light  
You can turn on the mobile light while taking pictures or recording videos.  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image or recording a video, select Advanced  
J
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Mobile Light and press (Select).  
J
3. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White Balance  
Under some conditions, the colours in pictures and videos may differ from the actual  
colours. If so, you can set the white balance so that the colours more closely resemble  
the actual colours.  
Note  
Night mode (page 123) can only  
be used when taking pictures if the  
white balance is set to Auto.  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image or recording a video, select Advanced  
J
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select White Balance and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a mode and press (Select).  
J
Auto: Adjust the white balance automatically in order to obtain natural colours.  
Daylight: Suitable for outdoors under a clear sky.  
Cloudy: Suitable for outdoors under a cloudy sky.  
Fluorescent (Day): Suitable for daylight fluorescent lighting.  
Fluorescent (Wht): Suitable for white fluorescent lighting.  
Tungsten: Suitable for incandescent lighting.  
Colour Control  
Adjust the colour tone.  
Note  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image or recording a video, select Advanced  
J
• Night mode (page 123) cannot  
be used when taking pictures if  
the colour control is set to  
Intense Colour or Soft  
Colour.  
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Colour Control and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Neutral Colour, Intense Colour or Soft Colour and press (Select).  
J
• Colour control cannot be used  
if the picture effects or effects  
are set to Sepia or Black &  
White.  
Camera/Video Camera  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Control  
Adjust the brightness for pictures and videos.  
1. Press (Options) before capturing image or recording a video, select Advanced  
J
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Exposure Control and press (Select).  
J
3. Use  
to adjust the exposure.  
F
Picture & Video Effects  
Take sepia tone and monochrome pictures.  
Note  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Camera and press (Select).  
@
J
• Colour control cannot be used  
if the picture effects or effects  
are set to Sepia or Black &  
White.  
2. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Camera Settings or Video Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
4. Select Picture Settings or Movie Settings and press (Select).  
5. Select Picture Effects or Effects and press (Select).  
J
6. Select Sepia, Black&White or Off and press (Select).  
J
Preview Setting  
Set whether to display the preview window after you take a picture or record a video.  
1. After Step 4 of “Picture & Video Effects” (above), select Preview and press  
J
(Select).  
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the File Name  
You can preset the file name to use when saving pictures and videos to the date and  
time or a name of your choice.  
1. After Step 3 of “Picture & Video Effects” (page 142), select File Name and press  
J
(Select).  
2. Select Date&Time or Define and press (Select).  
J
If you selected Define, enter a file name and press  
.
@
Setting Keypad Shortcuts  
You can set whether to use the keypad shortcuts for accessing functions while you are  
using the camera.  
1. After Step 3 of “Picture & Video Effects” (page 142), select Keypad Shortcut and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Camera/Video Camera  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following keypad shortcuts are available while you are taking  
pictures and recording videos.  
Taking Pictures  
Key Guide  
Recording Videos  
Key Guide  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
Camera Mode  
Delay Timer  
Picture Effects  
Picture Quality  
White Balance  
-
Record Mode  
Delay Timer  
Effects  
Video Quality  
White Balance  
Voice Record  
Screen Display  
-
Night Mode  
Picture Size  
Colour Control  
Mobile Light  
Colour Control  
Mobile Light  
Camera/Video Camera  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messaging  
Messaging allows you to send and receive text messages, pictures, sounds, vObjects and other  
data via the Vodafone live! Service Centre.  
In This Chapter  
Messaging Capabilities  
MMS  
SMS  
MMS/SMS Common Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messaging Capabilities  
Exchange text messages, pictures, sounds, vObjects, etc. with other handsets, PCs and  
other devices connected to the Internet. For details on the messaging service, contact  
Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
Note  
The network service is only available  
while  
or  
appears on the  
display.  
Changing Your Mail Address  
Change the account name (part before @) of your email address to help reduce  
spam. Random alphanumeric characters are set as the account name at the time of  
subscription.  
Note  
ご希望のEメールアドレス  
If  
は既に登  
録されています。他  
のアドレスを入力してくださ  
い。  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
).  
K
2. Select My Vodafone and press  
.
@
(The address has already  
been registered. Enter another  
address.) appears, repeat from  
Step 10.  
各種変更手続き  
3. Select  
and press  
.
@
オリジナルメール設定・各種メール設定  
4. Select  
and press  
.
@
• The above procedure may  
change without prior notice.  
For further information, contact  
Vodafone General Information  
(page 315).  
5. Select the centre access code input field and press  
.
@
6. Enter your centre access code and press  
.
@
7. Select OK and press  
.
@
1. 各種メール設定  
8. Select  
and press  
.
@
1. メールアドレス編集  
9. Select  
and press  
.
@
10. Select the character input field and press  
.
@
11. Enter an account name and press  
.
@
12. Select OK and press  
.
@
Messaging  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message Menu  
Access the Message menu by pressing  
(
) from standby mode.  
J
Tip  
Received Msgs.: Received messages are saved here (pages 153, 161).  
Create Message: Create and send an MMS or SMS message (pages 148, 159).  
Drafts: Draft are saved here (page 169).  
Alternatively, you can press  
a@  
from standby mode and select  
Messaging to access the Message  
menu.  
Sent Messages: Sent messages are saved here (pages 155, 162).  
Unsent Messages: Store messages that could not be sent (page 170).  
Server Mail Box: Connect to the mail server and set various settings (page 156).  
Templates: Use the preinstalled templates to create messages (pages 151, 160).  
Settings: Set various MMS and SMS settings (pages 157, 163, 164).  
Messaging  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MMS  
About MMS  
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) allows you to exchange multimedia messages  
containing data such as text, pictures, sounds, animations and video clips. For details on  
MMS, contact Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
Creating & Sending an MMS Message  
You can send a message up to 300 KB including the subject, body text and attachment  
files.  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
 
* > } i £  
Þ
ä ä ä ° ä É Î ä ä ° ä  L Ì i Ã  
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
R
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ` ` Ê , i V ˆ « ˆ i ˜ Ì Ã  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Create Message and press (Select).  
J
J
R
 ` ` Ê - Õ L  i V Ì  
R
 ` ` Ê /i Ý Ì  
2. Select MMS and press (Select).  
J
R
 ` ` Ê * ˆ V Ì Õ À i  
R
 ` ` Ê - œ Õ ˜ `  
The Create MMS Message window appears.  
R
 ` ` Ê 6 ˆ ` i œ  
R
 ` ` Ê " Ì  i À Ê  ˆ  i Ã  
3. Select an item and press  
.
@
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
Add Subject: Enter a subject.  
Add Text: Enter a message.  
Create MMS Message Window  
• To set the text colour and font size after text input, select the text in the Create  
Note  
MMS Message window, press (Options) and select Text Options.  
J
• To see how the text looks with 3D Pictogram Display after text input, select the  
Multiple files of the same type  
cannot be attached to one page.  
Also, some combinations of files  
may not be able to be attached to  
one page.  
text in the Create MMS Message window, press (Options) and select View  
J
as 3D Pict..  
Messaging  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Add Picture: Attach picture files. You can also activate the camera and take a  
picture to attach. To attach a preinstalled 2D, 3D or animated animal GIF file,  
selected Animated Emoticon.  
Add Sound: Attach sound files saved in Melody&Music.  
Add Video: Attach video files. You can also activate the camera and record a  
Tip  
• Any message that could not  
be sent is saved to Unsent  
Messages.  
• To play, edit and perform/set  
other options, from the Create  
MMS Message window, select  
video to attach.  
Add Other Files: Attach files such as vCard files in Other Files.  
an item and press (Options).  
Jj  
4. Select Add Recipients and press  
.
@
5. Select From Contacts, Enter Recipient or From Group List and press (Select).  
J
From Contacts: Select an address from the Contacts list (page 86).  
Enter Recipient: Enter an address using the keypad. You can enter up to 256  
characters.  
From Group List: Specify a group as the address from the Group list (page 84).  
6. Set an address and press  
.
@
7. Select Send MMS and press  
.
@
The message is sent and then saved to Sent Messages.  
Messaging  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recipient List Operations  
From the Create MMS Message window (page 148), select the address field and press  
    
£ Ó \ Î ä  
to display the Recipient list.  
@
ä Ó ä ° ä É Î ä ä ° ä  L Þ Ì i Ã  
 
 
 œ ˜ i  
 œ  ˜  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) from the Recipient list.  
J
Done: Confirms the address and displays the Create MMS Message window.  
Edit Recipient: Edit addresses.  
Add Recipients: Add addresses. You can enter up to 30 addresses for each of  
To, Cc and Bcc. However, a message can only be sent to up to 20 addresses.  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
Delete Recipient: Delete addresses.  
Save to Contacts: Save an address to the Contacts list.  
Set as To/Cc/Bcc: Switch To/Cc/Bcc for an address.  
Sending Options: Set the following sending options: Delivery Report, Delivery  
Time, Expiry Time and MMS Priority. You can preset these settings in “Sending  
Settings” (page 158) of the MMS settings.  
Recipient List Window  
Note  
Some items do not appear  
depending on the position of the  
cursor.  
Messaging  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using MMS Template  
Use MMS templates that have preset pictures and sounds to create messages. You can  
also edit MMS templates.  
Tip  
• Press (Options) in Step 3, to  
Jj  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Templates and press (Select).  
J
J
edit the template, etc.  
2. Select MMS Templates and press (Select).  
J
If preset templates have been  
deleted or edited, you can return  
them to their initial state by  
3. Select a template and press  
.
@
clearing the memory (page 249).  
For details on the following procedure, see “Creating & Sending an MMS Message”  
(page 148).  
Adding/Deleting Pages  
Add, delete and replace pages. Using multiple pages enables you to create a message  
that displays like a slide show. You can set up to 20 pages for each message.  
Tip  
To set the Page Duration or  
Background Colours of the page,  
select Page Options after Step 1.  
1. After Step 2 of "Creating & Sending an MMS Message" (page 148), press  
J
(Options).  
2. Select Add Page and press (Select).  
J
A page is added.  
When there is more than one page, you can perform the following operations if you  
select Page Control in Step 2.  
Add Page: Add a page.  
Delete Page: Delete a page.  
Previous Page/Next Page: Take you to the previous or next page.  
Move Page: Move a page to a specified position.  
Messaging  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the File Playback Time  
Set the playback time for the text and attached files.  
Note  
1. After Step 2 of "Creating & Sending an MMS Message" (page 148), select text or an  
A start time and display duration  
that exceeds the Page Duration  
(page 151) cannot be set.  
attached file and press (Options).  
J
2. Select Item Duration and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Start Time and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter the start time and press (OK).  
J
5. Select Duration and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter the display duration and press (OK).  
J
Messaging  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking MMS Messages in Received Msgs.  
When a message is received, animation plays while the ringtone is playing and your  
handset is vibrating. The indicator appears at the top of the display.  
Note  
Some files cannot be displayed/  
played unless the corresponding  
content key (content usage right)  
is downloaded.  
Received messages are saved to Received Msgs..  
For details on operations available from Received Msgs., see page 166.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Received Msgs. and press (Select).  
J
J
The list appears.  
The following indicators appear for MMS messages.  
Tip  
appears for unread messages.  
To open the Received Msgs. list,  
MMS message ( high priority level, low priority level)  
MMS notification ( high priority level, low priority level)  
Delivery report message  
select New MMS in the information  
prompt and press (Select).  
Jj  
   
£ Ó \ Î ä  
2. Select a message and press  
.
@
 
, i V i ˆ Û i ` Ê  Ã } Ã °  
 
Ó ä ä È É £ ä É  
£
£ Ó \ Î {  
The message appears.  
  i   œ t  
MMS messages with body text or only one page are displayed with 3D Pictogram  
Display in accordance with 3D Pict. Settings (page 164). If you receive an MMS  
message with multiple pages set, pictures, sounds and text are presented in a  
slideshow-like format. Whether an attached file displays/plays depends on the Auto-  
extract File setting of “Receiving Settings” (page 157). If there is an attached video  
or other file, the file icon is displayed.  
 
/  œ  > Ã  
- œ «  ˆ i  
  ˆ  Þ  
 > Ì Ì  i Ü  
 
ä  ä 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
List Window  
Messaging  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Complete MMS Messages  
When an MMS arrives, the first portion of the text message is received as a notification  
and the complete MMS is temporarily stored on the mail server (page 156). The  
indicator appears when a notification arrives. Perform the following steps to retrieve the  
complete message.  
Tip  
To receive complete messages  
automatically, set Retrieve Mode  
(page 157) to Immediate.  
1. Open notification message, select <Retrieve MMS> and press  
.
@
Messaging  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking MMS Messages in Sent Messages  
   
£ Ó \ Î ä  
Sent messages are saved to Sent Messages of the mailbox.  
 
- i ˜ Ì Ê  i Ã Ã > } i Ã  
For details on operations available from Sent Messages, see page 168.  
 
Ó ä ä È É £ ä É  
£
£ Ó \ Î {  
  i   œ t  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Sent Messages and press (Select).  
J
J
 
/  œ  > Ã  
  ˆ  Þ  
 > Ì Ì  i Ü  
The list appears.  
The following indicators appear for MMS messages.  
ä  ä 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8  
MMS message ( high priority level, low priority level)  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
Delivered MMS message ( high priority level, low priority level)  
MMS message for which delivery failed ( high priority level, low priority level)  
List Window  
2. Select a message and press  
.
@
The message appears.  
Messaging  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Mail List  
Incoming MMS messages with attached files or email messages from PCs or other  
devices are stored on the mail server. You can use the mail list to retrieve MMS  
messages and email messages.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Server Mail Box and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Press (Options).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
View: Check the contents of MMS notifications.  
Retrieve: Retrieve MMS messages.  
Update Mail List: Retrieve and updates the mail list.  
Delete: Delete a message stored on the mail server.  
Select Multi: Select multiple MMS notifications and delete or retrieve the  
messages.  
Forward: Forward messages stored on the mail server.  
Server Mail Volume: Check the usage rate on the mail server.  
Sort by: Change the order of MMS notifications.  
Delete All: Delete all messages stored on the mail server.  
Messaging  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MMS Settings  
Receiving Settings  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select MMS Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Receiving Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Retrieve Mode: Set whether to automatically retrieve messages received by the  
mail server. There are two settings: Home Network and Roaming Network. For  
each of the settings, you can select Immediate or Deferred.  
Auto-extract File: Set whether to automatically display/play picture and sound  
files attached to messages.  
Reply for Delivery: Set whether to reply to requests for delivery confirmation.  
Anonymous Msg.: Set whether to reject anonymous messages.  
Messaging  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Settings  
1. After Step 2 of “Receiving Settings” (page 157), select Sending Settings and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Delivery Report: Receive delivery reports to confirm whether sent messages  
were delivered to recipients.  
Delivery Time: Specify a time for delivering messages from the service centre to  
recipients.  
Expiry Time: Set the length of time a sent message is stored on the mail server.  
MMS Signature: Save a signature and then set whether to display the signature.  
MMS Priority: Set the message priority level to High, Normal or Low.  
Messaging  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SMS  
About SMS  
£ Ó \ Î ä  
The Short Message Service (SMS) allows you to exchange text message with other  
handsets. For details on SMS, contact Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
/i Ý Ì  
 
ä £ n É £ È ä  
 i   œ ]  œ Ü Ê > À i Ê Þ œ Õ   
Creating & Sending an SMS Message  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Create Message and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select SMS and press (Select).  
J
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
  i > À  
The Create Message window appears.  
Create SMS Message Window  
3. Enter a message and press  
.
@
You can enter up to 160 characters.  
4. Select From Contacts or Enter Recipient and press (Select).  
Note  
J
If you press (Cancel) while  
Kk  
an SMS message with multiple  
addresses set is being sent, the  
send operation is cancelled for  
the address set after the address  
to which the message is currently  
being sent.  
From Contacts: Select a phone number from the Contacts list (page 86).  
Enter Recipient: Enter a phone number using the keypad. You can enter up to  
20 digits.  
5. Set a phone number and press  
.
@
The Recipient list appears.  
6. Select Send SMS and press  
.
@
Tip  
The message is sent and then saved to Sent Messages.  
Any message that could not be  
sent is saved to Unsent Messages  
(page 170).  
Messaging  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recipient List Operations  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) from the Recipient  
list.  
J
Note  
Some items do not appear  
depending on the position of the  
cursor.  
Send: Send the message.  
Edit Recipient: Edit the address.  
Delete Recipient: Delete the address.  
Add Recipient: Add an address. You can enter up to ten addresses.  
Edit Message: Edit the message.  
Save to Contacts: Save an address to the Contacts list.  
Save to Drafts: Save the message as a draft message to Drafts.  
View as 3D Pict.: Check how the text you entered looks with 3D Pictogram  
Display.  
Sending Options: Set the following sending options: Delivery Report and  
Expiry Time. You can preset these settings in “SMS Settings” (page 163).  
Using SMS Template  
Templates allow you to enter messages easily.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Templates and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select SMS Templates and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a template and press  
.
@
For details on the following procedure, see “Creating & Sending an SMS Message”  
(page 159).  
Messaging  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking SMS Messages in Received Msgs.  
When a message is received, animation plays while the ringtone is playing and your  
handset is vibrating. If your handset is closed, the animation is displayed on the external  
display. The indicator appears at the top of the display.  
Tip  
To open the Received Msgs. list,  
select New SMS in the information  
Received messages are saved to Received Msgs..  
prompt and press (Select).  
Jj  
For details on operations available from Received Msgs., see page 166.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Received Msgs. and press (Select).  
J
J
    
£ Ó \ Î ä  
 
, i V i ˆ Û i ` Ê  Ã } Ã °  
The list appears.  
The following indicators appear for SMS messages.  
 
Ó ä ä È É £ ä É  
£
£ Ó \ Î {  
  i   œ t  
 
 
/  œ  > Ã  
appears for unread messages.  
- œ «  ˆ i  
 
  ˆ  Þ  
SMS Message  
SMS message in the USIM card  
WAP Push message  
 > Ì Ì  i Ü  
 
ä  ä 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8  
Delivery report message  
2. Select a message and press  
«
.
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
@
The message appears.  
List Window  
Checking WAP Push Messages  
A WAP Push message is a message delivered automatically from the service centre. Use  
the included links to access information. When you receive a message, the indicator  
appears at the top of the display. If Auto Launch (page 179) of the browser settings is  
set to On, your handset accesses the specified URL as soon as the message is received.  
Some push messages are just saved to the Received Msgs..  
Messaging  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking SMS Messages in Sent Messages  
    
£ Ó \ Î ä  
Sent messages are saved to Sent Messages of the mailbox.  
 
- i ˜ Ì Ê  i Ã Ã > } i Ã  
For details on operations available from Sent Messages, see page 168.  
 
Ó ä ä È É £ ä É  
£
£ Ó \ Î {  
  i   œ t  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Sent Messages and press (Select).  
J
J
 
 
 
 
 
/  œ  > Ã  
- œ «  ˆ i  
  ˆ  Þ  
The list appears.  
The following indicators appear for SMS messages.  
 > Ì Ì  i Ü  
ä  ä 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8  
SMS message  
SMS message in the USIM card  
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
2. Select a message and press  
The message appears.  
.
@
List Window  
Messaging  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SMS Settings  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
Note  
2. Select SMS Settings and press (Select).  
J
Do not change the centre number  
for the Message Centre unless  
Vodafone informs you that it has  
been changed. Otherwise, you  
will no longer be able to use the  
service.  
3. Select an item and press  
.
@
Delivery Report: Receive delivery reports to confirm whether sent messages  
were delivered to recipients.  
Expiry Time: Set an expiry time for messages.  
SMS Signature: Save a signature and then set whether to display the signature.  
Message Centre: Change the centre number for SMS. The centre number is  
saved to the USIM card.  
SMS Type: Set the SMS type for outgoing messages to Text, Email, Fax Group 3,  
Fax Group 4 or Pager.  
Messaging  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MMS/SMS Common Operations  
Setting 3D Pictogram Display  
3D Pictogram Display is a 3D animation display function compatible with words,  
pictographs and emoticons in text. You can set the display conditions, background  
colour and display speed.  
Note  
• 3D Pictogram Display cannot  
display MMS messages with  
more than one page, SMS/  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
MMS messages with no body  
text, MMS notifications, delivery  
reports and WAP push messages.  
• Background playback of a  
music file may be paused if you  
use 3D Pictogram Display.  
2. Select 3D Pict. Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Auto Play: Set the conditions for displaying received messages with 3D  
Pictogram Display. If Unread Only is set, only unread messages are displayed  
with 3D Pictogram Display.  
Colour Settings: Set the font and background colours for 3D Pictogram Display.  
Tip  
• You can display up to 150  
characters regardless of  
whether the characters are  
single byte or double byte.  
” indicates the maximum  
number of characters has been  
exceeded.  
• You can use  
display speed of 3D Pictogram  
Display while display is paused.  
to change the  
Fa  
Messaging  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Settings  
You can set various settings common to MMS and SMS.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select Common Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Reply Settings: Set whether to quote received messages when replying to them.  
Display Font Size: Select a message font size from Large, Standard and  
Small.  
Page Scroll: Select the scroll unit of the message display window from 1 Line,  
Half Screen and Full Screen.  
Messaging  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Received Msgs. Operations  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) from the Received  
Msgs. list or a message.  
J
Note  
• Some items do not appear  
depending on the message  
type or window.  
• When Auto-delete is set to On  
and memory becomes full, the  
oldest MMS message is deleted  
when a new MMS message is  
received and the oldest SMS  
message is deleted when a  
new SMS message is received.  
• When the memory for Drafts,  
Unsent Messages and  
Templates becomes full, a new  
message cannot be created  
regardless of the setting for  
Auto-delete.  
View: Check the contents of the message.  
Retrieve: Download the body text and attachment files of the MMS message (only  
for notification messages).  
Play: Play the MMS message from the first page.  
Reply: Reply to the message.  
View as 3D Pict.: View a message with 3D Pictogram Display.  
Delete: Delete one message.  
Save Sender: Save the phone number of the sender to the Contacts list.  
Select Multi: Specify multiple messages and then retrieve or delete them. You  
can also switch between protected and unprotected or read and unread messages  
and move messages to another folder.  
Forward: Forward the message.  
Call Sender: Make a call to the sender of the message.  
Manage Folder: Set Auto-delete and create folders. If a message  
in a folder is selected, you can delete or rename the folder and set automatic  
sorting.  
Sort by: Change the order that messages appear. You can select a sort option  
from Date from Latest, Date from Oldest, Sender, Unread to Read and  
Message Type.  
Delete All: Delete all messages in Received Msgs..  
Extract: Use a phone number, email address, URL or file (MMS message only) in  
the message.  
Messaging  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View Item: View all files attached to the MMS message. You can also play, display  
and save files.  
Save as Template: Save the message as a template.  
Copy Text: Specify a range of text in any part of the message and then copy the  
text.  
Move to USIM/Phone: Move the SMS message to your USIM card or handset.  
Details: Display the message properties (time stamp, priority, address, size, etc.).  
Load: Start the browser and displays the Web page (only for a WAP Push  
message).  
View Original Msg.: Display the message for which delivery was confirmed (only  
for a delivery report).  
Messaging  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sent Messages Operations  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) from the Sent  
Messages list or a message.  
J
Note  
• Some items do not appear  
depending on the message  
type or window.  
View: Check the contents of the message.  
Play: Play the MMS message from the first page.  
Resend: Edit the message and then resend it.  
View as 3D Pict.: View a message with 3D Pictogram Display.  
Delete: Delete one message.  
Select Multi: Select multiple messages and then delete them or move them to  
another folder.  
Forward: Forward the message.  
Extract: Use a phone number, email address, URL or file (MMS message only) in  
the message.  
• When Auto-Delete is set to  
Off and memory becomes full,  
a warning message appears  
and new messages cannot be  
created. Delete messages you  
no longer require or set Auto-  
Delete to On. However, MMS  
messages saved to a folder you  
created are not deleted.  
Call Recipient: Make a call to the recipient of the message.  
Manage Folder: Set Auto-Delete and create folders. If a message in a folder is  
selected, you can delete or rename the folder and set automatic sorting.  
Sort by: Change the order that messages appear. You can select a sort option  
from Date from Latest, Date from Oldest, Recipient and Message Type.  
Delete All: Delete all messages in Sent Messages.  
View Item: View all files attached to the MMS message. You can also play, display  
and save files.  
Save as Template: Save the message as a template.  
Copy Text: Specify a range of text in any part of the message and then copy the  
text.  
Move to USIM/Phone: Move the SMS message to your USIM card or handset.  
Details: Display the message properties (time stamp, priority, address, size, etc.).  
Messaging  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drafts  
Save the messages you create to Drafts.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Drafts and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select a message and press (Options).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Edit: Edit the message.  
Delete: Select from One, All or Select Multi for deleting messages.  
Send: Send the message.  
Call Recipient: Make a call to the recipient of the message.  
Sort by: Change the order that messages appear. You can select a sort option  
from Date from Latest, Date from Oldest, Recipient and Message Type.  
Messaging  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unsent Messages  
Messages that could not be sent are saved to Unsent Messages.  
1. In standby mode, press  
(
), select Unsent Messages and press (Select).  
J
J
2. Select a message and press (Options).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Edit: Edit the message.  
Send: Send the message.  
Delete: Delete the message.  
Select Multi: Specify multiple messages and then send or delete them.  
Call Recipient: Make a call to the recipient of the message.  
Sort by: Change the order that messages appear. You can select a sort option  
from Date from Latest, Date from Oldest, Recipient and Message Type.  
Delete All: Delete all messages.  
Messaging  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vodafone live!  
Vodafone live! is an online service that allows you to use the Internet to access various genres of  
content. You can browse information or download pictures, melodies and applications.  
In This Chapter  
Accessing Vodafone live!  
Bookmarks  
Operations for Web Pages  
Browser Settings  
V-appli  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing Vodafone live!  
You can access Vodafone live! to search for and obtain information.  
Note  
A separate subscription is required to use the Vodafone live! service. For details, contact  
Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
The network service is only available  
while  
or  
appears on the  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Vodafone live! and press (Select).  
@
J
display.  
The Vodafone live! menu appears.  
2. Select Vodafone live! and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
The indicator appears at the top of the display during communication.  
• To display the Vodafone live!  
Web menu, press  
standby mode.  
3. Press  
to end Vodafone live!.  
O
(
) from  
Kk  
• To switch to English, select  
English after Step 2.  
Vodafone live! Menu  
You can perform the following operations via the Vodafone live! menu.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Vodafone live! and press (Select).  
@
J
The Vodafone live! menu appears.  
2. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Vodafone live!: Display the Vodafone live! Web menu.  
Enter URL: Access a Web page by directly entering the address.  
Bookmarks: Bookmark your favourite Web pages and access bookmarked Web  
pages (page 175).  
History: Display the addresses of accessed Web pages in the order of newest to  
oldest.  
Browser Settings: Set various browser settings (page 179).  
Vodafone live!  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Assignments for Browsing the Web  
The following shows the key assignments for browsing the Web.  
: Select an item or displays the Option menu.  
: Take you back to the previous window.  
J
K
: Select an item.  
@
: Scroll up or down.  
: Scroll left or right.  
G
F
: End communication. If your handset is not connected, takes you back to standby  
mode.  
O
to  
: Act as a shortcut to a link with a number.  
1
*
9
*
and  
: Act as a shortcut to a link with or #. You can also use these keys to  
perform supported operations.  
#
Side Key ( ): Increase the volume level.  
P
Side Key ( ): Decrease the volume level. To set the volume to mute, press and hold the  
Q
key.  
Vodafone live!  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bookmarks  
If you bookmark frequently accessed pages, you can access them quickly and easily.  
Adding a Bookmark  
1. Display a page and press (Options).  
J
2. Select Bookmarks and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Add Bookmark and press (Select).  
J
4. Select the title field and press  
.
@
5. Edit the title and press  
.
@
6. Press (OK).  
J
7. Select Root Folder and press (OK).  
J
Vodafone live!  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Bookmarks  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Vodafone live! and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Bookmarks and press (Select).  
J
3. Select the title of the page and press (Options).  
J
To access the page of the selected title, press  
.
@
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Go to URL: Enter a URL and display the Web page for the URL.  
Send: Send the URL in an SMS or MMS message.  
New Entry: Enter a new URL to add as a bookmark.  
Delete: Select from One or All for deleting bookmarks.  
Move: Move a bookmark to another folder.  
Select Multi: Select multiple bookmarks and then delete or move them to  
another folder.  
Edit: Edit a bookmark title or URL.  
Create Folder: Create a folder.  
Vodafone live!  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations for Web Pages  
You can perform various operations while a Web page is displayed.  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) while a Web page is  
J
displayed.  
Select: Select the item at the cursor position.  
Bookmarks: Add a bookmark for the displayed Web page or references existing  
bookmarks. You can also create a folder.  
My Saved Pages: Save the displayed page to My Saved Pages.  
Previous Page: Take you back to the previous page.  
Next Page: Take you to the next page (if one exists in cache).  
Go to URL: Enter a URL or select information to display from access history.  
Send Page: Send the URL in an SMS or MMS message.  
Reload Page: Update the information.  
File Select Mode: Select a file in the information.  
Page Details: Check page details.  
Other Settings: Copy text and change the font size or encoding of information.  
You can also clear the cache and check server certificate details.  
Do Actions: Perform the action specified in the displayed Web page.  
Vodafone live!  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Files in Web Pages  
You can perform various operations such as saving and displaying/playing picture and  
animation files in Web pages.  
Note  
• Copy restrictions may prevent  
some files from being saved.  
• Some downloaded files may not  
be able to be displayed/played  
properly.  
1. Display a Web page containing a file and press (Options).  
J
2. Select File Select Mode and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a file and press (Options).  
J
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
File Details: Confirm details such as the file name, file size, save permission and  
transfer permission.  
Save: Save the file to Data Folder.  
Play/View: Play or displays the file data.  
Paging Mode: Take you back to paging mode.  
Exit Browser: End the browser.  
Vodafone live!  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading Files from Links  
Download files from links and other objects in some Web pages.  
Note  
1. Display a Web page, select a character string for which a link is set and press  
.
@
• Copy restrictions may prevent  
some files from being saved.  
2. Press (Yes).  
J
• Some downloaded files may not  
be able to be displayed/played  
properly.  
Downloading begins.  
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Play: Play the file.  
Save: Save the file to Data Folder.  
File Details: Confirm details such as the file name, file size and file type.  
Vodafone live!  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browser Settings  
Set various browser settings.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Vodafone live! and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Browser Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Text Settings: If you select Text Browser, you can set your handset to download  
only text information even when the download information contains images  
and sounds. If you select Font Size, you can change the font size of text in  
information.  
Memory Manager: Clear the access history, Cookies, Web cache and DNS  
(Domain Name Server) cache. You can also enable or disable the storing of  
cookies.  
Manufacture No.: Set whether to send automatically the International Mobile  
Equipment Identity (IMEI) of your handset as your User ID when a request is  
received from the network.  
Certification: Confirm details on a certificate issued from a certificate authority.  
Auto Launch: Set whether to start the browser automatically when a WAP push  
message is received.  
Location Property: Set whether to send location information automatically when  
a location request is received while downloading information.  
Vodafone live!  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V-appli  
From Web pages, you can download a variety of Java™ compatible applications such  
as games.  
Applications  
In addition to ordinary applications that run solely on your handset, some applications  
need to connect to the network (Web). Network V-appli enable you to play a game online  
or download information in real time.  
Note  
• When you use a network  
application, a communication  
fee is charged each time the  
application connects to the  
network. The communication  
fee is the same as that for  
using the Web.  
• When offline mode is set (page  
229), some network  
applications may not run  
properly.  
Vodafone live!  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V-appli Menu  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select V-appli and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
V-appli Library: Save applications downloaded from the Web and access  
preinstalled applications.  
Screensavers: Store standby mode applications downloaded from the Web.  
You can also set which application runs in standby mode or switch the standby  
setting on or off (page 183). To set the application start time or length of time the  
application runs before pausing, select Set Time.  
Settings: Set various application settings (page 184).  
Java Information: Display an explanation on the Java™ licence.  
Vodafone live!  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading V-appli  
Download applications. Before downloading an application, you can confirm details such  
as the download size and storage size.  
Note  
• If the battery level is low at  
the start of downloading,  
the application may not be  
completely downloaded.  
Charging the battery  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select V-appli and press (Select).  
J
3. Select V-appli Library and press (Select).  
J
beforehand is recommended.  
4. Select Download V-appli and press  
.
@
• If you replace the USIM card,  
downloaded applications will no  
longer be available.  
5. Press (Yes).  
J
An application download site appears.  
6. Select an application and press  
.
@
The application details window appears.  
7. Press (Downld.).  
J
8. Select Phone Memory or Memory Card and press (Select).  
J
Downloading begins.  
9. Press (Yes).  
J
The V-appli Library appears.  
Vodafone live!  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting V-appli  
You can run one application in standby mode.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
To pause or return to the  
2. Select V-appli and press (Select).  
J
application, select Pause or  
Resume after pressing  
in  
Oo  
3. Select V-appli Library and press (Select).  
J
Step 5.  
4. Select an application and press  
.
@
The indicator appears at the top of the display and the application starts. If you  
close your handset, the application stops.  
5. Press  
, select Quit in the confirmation window that appears and press (Select)  
O
J
to end the application.  
Setting the Screensaver  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select V-appli and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Screensavers and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Screensavers and press (Select).  
J
To cancel the screensaver, select Off.  
5. Select an application and press (Select).  
J
6. Press (Yes).  
J
Vodafone live!  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V-appli Settings  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select V-appli and press (Select).  
J
J
• You can also change the volume  
level while an application is  
running. Press a side key ( )  
to increase the volume level  
and press a side key ( ) to  
3. Select Settings and press (Select).  
Pp  
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Priority Settings: Set the priority for when there is an incoming call, incoming  
message or alarm while an application is running. To give priority to voice calls,  
video calls, messages or alarms and pause the application, select Voice Calls,  
Video Calls, Messages or Alarms. To display a notification at the top of the  
display without pausing the application, select Notification.  
Qq  
decrease the volume level.  
• If the memory is cleared, any  
preinstalled applications that  
were deleted are reinstalled and  
returned to their initial state.  
Backlight: If you select Backlight, you can set the display lighting setting for  
when a V-appli is running. If you select Blinking, you can set whether to enable  
the preset backlight blinking operation of a V-appli.  
Volume: Adjust the volume for when an application is running. You can also set  
the volume to mute.  
Vibration: Set the preset vibration of an application on or off.  
MemoryCard Sync.: Update the V-appli information in a memory card.  
Reset Settings: If you select Master Reset, you can reset all V-appli function  
settings. If you select Clear Memory, you can reset all V-appli function settings  
and delete all downloaded applications.  
Vodafone live!  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing V-appli  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select V-appli and press (Select).  
J
3. Select V-appli Library and press (Select).  
J
4. Select an application and press (Options).  
J
5. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Start: Run the application.  
Delete: Delete the application.  
Select Multi: Select multiple applications and then delete them or move them to  
a memory card.  
Memory Card/Phone Memory: Switch from the V-appli Library in your handset  
(Data Folder) to the V-appli Library in a memory card.  
Details: Confirm details on the application.  
Security Settings: Set the display method for the confirmation window that  
appears when you attempt to use certain functions while an application is  
activated.  
Vodafone live!  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vodafone live! CAST  
Subscribe to services to automatically have information delivered regularly.  
In This Chapter  
Vodafone live! CAST  
Subscribing/Cancelling Subscription  
Checking Content Updates  
Downloading Content Manually  
Checking History  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vodafone live! CAST  
With this service, you can subscribe to contents and receive automatic updates. Content  
updates are received during the night. When updates are received, Information Prompt  
appears and the following indicators appear:  
Downloading content  
New CAST content  
Download failed  
• A monthly subscription fee is required to use this service. No additional fees required  
for receiving content.  
• Vodafone live! CAST contents available only in Japanese (as of March 2006).  
• Vodafone live! CAST is only available in Japan.  
Vodafone live! CAST  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Subscribing/Cancelling Subscription  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
Note  
2. Select CAST and press (Select).  
J
Transmission fees apply during  
web connection.  
3. Select Reg. /Cancel and press (Select).  
J
4. Press (Yes).  
J
Follow the onscreen instructions.  
Vodafone live! CAST  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Content Updates  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
J
Tip  
2. Select CAST and press (Select).  
To delete content, select the  
3. Select What’s New? and press  
.
@
content after Step 3, press  
Jj  
(Options) and select Delete.  
Indicator Description:  
Unread  
Read  
Checking Content from Information Prompt  
1. When the information prompt appears, select New CAST Contents and press  
J
(Select).  
Vodafone live! CAST  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading Content Manually  
When an update cannot be received because your handset is turned off or the signal is  
weak, manually download the update. Only updates for that day can be downloaded.  
Note  
• Past updates cannot be  
downloaded.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Entertainment and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select CAST and press (Select).  
J
• Content cannot be downloaded  
on non-delivery days.  
3. Select Get Latest and press (Select).  
J
4. Press (Yes).  
J
A connection is established to the redelivery page.  
Requesting Redelivery from Information Prompt  
1. When the information prompt appears, select CAST Information and press  
J
(Select).  
2. Press (Yes).  
J
A connection is established to the redelivery page.  
Vodafone live! CAST  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking History  
Past updates are saved to History.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Entertainment and press (Select).  
Note  
@
J
• Up to seven items are saved  
to History. The oldest item is  
deleted automatically.  
2. Select CAST and press (Select).  
J
Indicator Description:  
• Up to 3 MB of content including  
the latest item can be saved.  
When either the maximum  
number of content items or  
the maximum content size is  
reached, the oldest item is  
deleted each time there is a  
new item.  
You have unread content  
You have read all content  
3. Select History and press (Select).  
J
Indicator Description:  
Unread  
Read  
• To delete past updates, select  
the item after Step 3, press  
Jj  
4. Select content and press (Select).  
J
(Options) and select Delete.  
Vodafone live! CAST  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data Folder  
The data you save in your handset is stored in Data Folder. You can move the data stored in the  
folders of Data Folder and edit it for use with other functions.  
In This Chapter  
Data Folder  
Using Files & Folders  
Displaying Files on a TV  
Using vObjects  
Using a Memory Card  
Using the USIM Card  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data Folder  
Data Folder of your handset stores the pictures you take, videos you record, files you  
receive from external devices, files you download from the Web, etc. Data Folder can  
store up to 40 MB or a total of a combination of approximately 500 files and personal  
folders. You can also use Data Folder of a memory card (page 44). The ability to store  
the maximum amount of files will depend on available space in a memory card.  
Structure of Data Folder  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Data Folder and press (Select).  
@
J
Note  
The following folders are preinstalled in your handset.  
There are no My Saved Pages and  
Templates folders in Data Folder of  
a memory card.  
Pictures: Contain pictures and the Digital Camera folder. Pictures you take in  
Digital Camera are saved in DCF (page 194) format to the Digital Camera folder.  
Videos: Contain videos.  
Melody&Music: Contain sound files and the Recordings folder. Recordings you  
record with the voice recorder are saved to the Recordings folder.  
Tip  
V-appli: Contain V-appli.  
My Saved Pages: Contain URLs and Web pages.  
Templates: Contain the SMS Templates to store templates for use with SMS  
messages and the MMS Templates to store templates for use with MMS  
messages.  
To display the memory usage  
status, select Memory Status.  
Other Files: Contain vCard, vCalendar, SVG and text files, as well as files of  
unknown types.  
Data Folder  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Files Storable in Data Folder  
Folder  
File Format (Icon)  
JPEG ( ), GIF ( ), WBMP ( ), PNG (  
Tip  
Pictures  
)
• Chaku Uta®, V-appli, video and  
other files saved to the handset  
or a memory card may become  
inaccessible after handset  
Digital Camera  
Videos  
JPEG1 (  
)
MPEG-42 (  
)
repairs, handset upgrades or  
the USIM card is replaced.  
Melody&Music  
AMR/MPEG-42 ( ), SMF/SP-MIDI2 ( ),  
SMAF ( ), XMF (  
• Chaku Uta® is a registered  
trademark of Sony Music  
Entertainment (Japan) Inc.  
)
Recordings  
V-appli  
AMR (  
Java (  
)
)
• You may not be able to open a  
file on a PC, PDA, or other  
device if: You change the file  
name on your handset or the  
file name includes a "~" or "-."  
My Saved Pages  
HTML/XHTML (  
)
SMS/MMS Templates Template (  
/
)
Other Files  
vCard ( ), vCalendar ( ), SVG (  
Text ( ), Unknown File Types3 (  
)
• Whether a file can be sent  
by Bluetooth™ connection  
or moved to a memory card  
depends on the forwarding  
and external device forwarding  
permission properties.  
)
1 Files that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be displayed. DCF is an  
abbreviation for "Design rule for Camera File system," a standard developed by  
the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association (JEIDA) for the purpose of  
facilitating the transfer of digital camera images among various devices.  
2 Some files may not be able to be played.  
3 These files cannot be displayed/played on your handset.  
Data Folder  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Files & Folders  
Connecting to the Web from Folders  
Connect to the Web from within preinstalled folders in Data Folder.  
Download Pictures: Download picture files.  
Download Videos: Download video files.  
Download Ringtone: Download sound files.  
Download Music: Download music files.  
Download V-appli: Download V-appli.  
Note  
Editing Files & Folders  
• Some items do not appear  
depending on the selected file  
or folder.  
• Some files may not be able to  
be displayed, played or sent  
depending on their file size,  
contents and type.  
Some files saved to a memory  
card from a PC or other device  
may not be able to be displayed/  
played.  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) while viewing files or  
folders in Data Folder.  
J
View: Display the selected file.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
Connect: Connect to the preset Web page.  
Take Picture: Take pictures.  
Record Video: Record videos.  
Play: Play the selected file.  
Start: Run an application.  
Send: Send the selected file as an MMS or Bluetooth™.  
Tip  
To copy characters selected in a  
displayed text file to the clipboard  
(page 74), press (Copy).  
Jj  
Data Folder  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delete: Delete just the selected file or all files within the folder. Select One to  
delete the selected file and select All to delete all files. However, if the folder  
contains a personal folder, the files within the personal folder are not deleted even  
if you select All.  
Select Multi: Select multiple files and then simultaneously delete, copy or move  
them.  
Set as Wallpaper: Set a picture as the wallpaper for standby mode.  
Set as Ringtone: Set a sound as the ringtone.  
Memory Card/Phone Memory: Switch the display between Data Folder in your  
handset and Data Folder in a memory card.  
Details: Display the properties of the selected file.  
Thumbnail View/List View: Switch the display of files and folders between  
thumbnail view (icons and images) and list view (text and guide).  
View Settings: Select List View to display a list of files/folders and select  
Thumbnail View to switch the view back. Select Slideshow to display the  
pictures in the folder in sequence automatically.  
Manage Folder: Create a new folder or edit the selected folder. You can select  
from Create Folder, Rename Folder, Delete Folder and Folder Security.  
Sort by: Change the order that files within the selected folder appear. You can  
select a sort option from Filename, Size, Date from Latest and Date from  
Oldest.  
Sort: Change the order that files within the My Saved Pages folder appear. Select  
Title or Date.  
Create Folder: Create a new folder.  
Create Message: Display the Create Message window for MMS or SMS.  
Create Template: Create a new template.  
Edit Template: Edit the selected template.  
Data Folder  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rename: Change the name of the selected file.  
Mute/Unmute: Mute the playback sound.  
Full Screen/Normal Screen: Switch the screen display.  
Hide Controller/Show Controller: Hide or show the controller.  
Record Voice: Record sound.  
Zoom: Enlarge or reduce the selected picture.  
Advanced: Edit the selected picture.  
Expand/Reduce: Expand or reduce the image attached to the selected file.  
Save Thumbnail: Save a picture taken in Digital Camera mode as a thumbnail  
for sending attached to a message.  
Save to Contacts/Save to Calendar: Save vObjects to the Contacts list or  
Calendar.  
Rewind: Return the play position of the video being played to the beginning.  
Reset: Return a file to the state directly after it was read.  
Save: Save a file to your handset or a memory card.  
Show Guidance/Hide Guidance: Show or hide the key guidance.  
Security Settings: Set the display method for the confirmation window that  
appears when you attempt to use certain functions while an application is  
activated.  
Data Folder  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Files on a TV  
Connect handset to a TV to display camera and video files.  
Tip  
This feature is only available when  
camera function is activated.  
Setting the TV System  
The TV systems supported by your handset are NTSC (Japan and U.S.A.) and PAL  
(Europe). SECAM is not supported.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select AV Output and press (Select).  
J
4. Select NTSC or PAL and press (Select).  
J
Data Folder  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Handset to TV  
Use the video output cable (optional) to connect the handset to a TV.  
1. Connect your handset to a TV.  
Open the earphone microphone/AV OUT jack cover of your handset.  
Insert the video output cable plug into the earphone microphone/AV OUT jack.  
Connect the video output cable to the video input jacks of the TV.  
2. Open a file on your handset, then press and hold  
.
H
3. Press (Yes).  
J
The image appears on the TV.  
To return output from TV to main display, press and hold  
.
H
Note  
The screen display cannot be  
switched while you are recording  
a video or when the delay timer is  
activated.  
Data Folder  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using vObjects  
About vObjects  
vObject is a collective name for file formats that enable your handset and other vObject  
compatible handsets, PCs and other devices to exchange and mutually use data such as  
Contacts list entries and Calendar data.  
You can send and receive vObjects as mail attachments (page 148) or transfer them  
by Bluetooth™ or via a USB cable. Received files can be used on your handset. If you  
save vObjects to a memory card, you can use them directly from other memory card  
compatible handsets, PCs and other devices. Similarly, vObjects saved to a memory  
card from other handsets, PCs and other devices can be used on your phone.  
vObject compatible software is required to use the data of vObjects on a PC or  
other device.  
Depending on the software used, vObjects may not be displayed properly.  
Depending on the contents of vObjects, the import of vObjects received from  
another Vodafone handset, PC or other device may not be possible.  
Depending on the contents of vObjects, the exchange of vObjects between a  
vObject compatible handset and PC or other device may not be possible.  
When vObjects include many characters, all vObject may not be able to be sent or  
received.  
Data Folder  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a vObject  
1. Display a data.  
For details on displaying the Contacts list, see page 86.  
For details on checking appointments, see page 258.  
2. Press (Options).  
J
3. Select Send vCard or Send vCalendar and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a storage place and press (Select).  
J
To Data Folder: Save the data in vCard/vCalendar format to the Other Files folder  
in Data Folder of your handset.  
To Memory Card: Save the data in vCard/vCalendar format to the Other Files  
folder in Data Folder of a memory card.  
Importing a vObject into a Function  
Add data imported in vObject format from another handset or PC to the Contacts list or  
Calendar of your handset.  
Note  
When importing a vObject that  
has a picture to the Contacts list,  
the picture cannot be saved to the  
Contacts list if it exceeds W112 ×  
H112.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Data Folder and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Other Files and press  
.
@
3. Select a vObject and press  
.
@
4. Press (Options).  
J
5. Select Save to Contacts or Save to Calendar and press (Select).  
J
Data Folder  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Memory Card  
Check and edit pictures and other data saved to a memory card. You can also save a  
backup of Data Folder, Contacts list and other data in your handset to a memory card.  
Formatting a Memory Card  
Use your handset to format a memory card.  
If a memory card is removed while reading or writing data, the data may be lost or  
the memory card may be damaged.  
If a memory card is formatted by another device, it may not work properly with  
your handset. Be sure to use your handset to format a memory card.  
Formatting a memory card deletes all data in the memory card.  
1. Insert a memory card in the slot of your handset.  
2. In standby mode, press , select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
3. Select Memory Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Memory Card and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Format Card and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter your security code (page 54).  
7. Press (Yes).  
J
Data Folder  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confirming Memory Card Usage Status  
Confirm the volume label, card memory size, used memory size and remaining memory  
size.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Memory Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Memory Card and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Card Details and press (Select).  
J
Using a Memory Card for Transferring Data  
Transfer Contacts list and Calendar data between your handset and a memory card.  
We recommend using a memory card for backing up personal data. A memory card  
needs to be formatted before it is used for the first time. For details on formatting, see  
“Formatting a Memory Card” (page 202).  
Note  
When you back up/restore data,  
offline mode is set. The indicator  
appears at the top of the display  
while offline mode is set. When the  
backing up/restoring of data is  
complete, offline mode is cancelled.  
Data Folder  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the USIM Card  
You can move or copy Contacts list entries from your handset or a memory card to the  
USIM card, as well as move SMS messages from your handset to the USIM card. An  
indicator at the top of the Contacts list window (page 86) indicates the storage place of  
the Contacts list entry. The maximum number of entries you can save to the Contacts  
list of the USIM card differs depending on the amount of available memory space in the  
USIM card.  
Moving Contacts List Entries  
Moving Entries to the USIM Card  
Move the name and default phone number (page 90) of an entry.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
To move Contacts list entries in a  
memory card to the USIM card,  
select Memory Card after Step  
3. After the Contacts list in the  
memory card appears, proceed  
from Step 3.  
2. Select Contacts List and press (Select).  
J
3. Press (Options).  
J
4. Select Select Multi and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a Contacts list entry and press  
.
@
To select another Contacts list entry, repeat Step 5.  
6. Press (Options).  
J
7. Select Move and press (Select).  
J
Data Folder  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Select To USIM and press (Select).  
J
To Phone: Move Contacts list entries with a check mark to the Contacts list of  
your handset.  
To Memory Card: Move Contacts list entries with a check mark to the Contacts  
list of a memory card.  
9. Press (Yes).  
J
Moving Entries from the USIM Card  
1. After Step 4 of “Moving Entries to the USIM Card” (page 204), select a Contacts list  
entries with and then perform the rest of the Steps.  
Data Folder  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Contacts List Entries  
Copying Entries to the USIM Card  
Copy the name and default phone number (page 90) of an entry.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Phonebook and press (Select).  
@
J
To copy Contacts list entries in a  
memory card to the USIM card,  
select Memory Card after Step  
3. After the Contacts list in the  
memory card appears, proceed  
from Step 3.  
2. Select Contacts List and press (Select).  
J
3. Press (Options).  
J
4. Select Select Multi and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a Contacts list entry and press  
.
@
To select another Contacts list entry, repeat Step 5.  
6. Press (Options).  
J
7. Select Copy and press (Select).  
J
8. Select To USIM and press (Select).  
J
To Phone: Copy Contacts list entries with a check mark to the Contacts list of  
your handset.  
To Memory Card: Copy Contacts list entries with a check mark to the Contacts  
list of a memory card.  
9. Press (Yes).  
J
Copying Entries from the USIM Card  
1. After Step 4 of “Copying Entries to the USIM Card” (above), select the Contacts list  
entries with and then perform the rest of the Steps.  
Data Folder  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Moving SMS Messages  
Move messages in Received Msgs. (page 161) and Sent Messages (page 162) of your  
handset and messages in your USIM card. The maximum number of messages you can  
save to the USIM card differs depending on the amount of available memory space in  
the USIM card.  
Moving Messages to the USIM Card  
1. In Received Msgs. or Sent Messages, select a message and press  
.
@
2. Press (Options).  
J
3. Select Move to USIM and press (Select).  
J
Move to Phone: Move messages in the USIM card to your handset.  
Moving Messages from the USIM Card  
1. In Step 1 of “Moving Messages to the USIM Card” (above), select the messages with  
and then perform the rest of the Steps.  
Data Folder  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings  
You can make various settings to personalise your handset.  
In This Chapter  
Mode Settings  
Display Settings  
Phone Settings  
Call Settings  
Security Settings  
Memory Settings  
Network Settings  
Location Settings  
Shortcut Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode Settings  
Set and customise sound and vibration settings. Your handset has four preset profiles.  
You can change the sound and vibration settings of each profile.  
Tip  
To switch the phone profile to  
Normal: Profile for ordinary use.  
Silent, press and hold  
in  
#>  
Silent: Profile for when you do not want your handset to emit any sound.  
standby mode. To switch back to  
previous profile, press and hold  
Car: Profile for when you want the maximum volume level so that you can hear  
your handset while you are driving.  
in standby mode.  
#>  
Meeting: Profile for configuring all settings to suit your needs.  
Switching Profiles  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Mode Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a profile and press  
.
@
If a profile other than Normal is set, the indicator (  
appears at the top of the display.  
/
/
) for the profile  
Settings  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising Profiles  
Tip  
Personalising the Ringtone Volume  
You can also personalise Normal  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
profile if you press  
mode, select Settings and then  
select Sound Settings.  
in standby  
a@  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Ringtone Volume and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Voice Call, Video Call or Received Message and press (Select).  
J
5. Use  
to adjust the volume and press (OK).  
E
J
Settings  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising the Ringtone  
Set a preinstalled sound in your handset or a sound or video in Data Folder as the  
ringtone.  
Note  
• If a video file is set as the  
ringtone, the video is displayed  
for incoming calls and the  
picture set as the incoming  
picture (page 219) is not  
displayed.  
• A video file cannot be set  
as the ringtone for incoming  
messages.  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Assign Ringtone and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Voice Call, Video Call or Received Message and press (Select/  
J
Options).  
If you selected Received Message, select Ringtone and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a type of tone and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
Preset Patterns: Select from patterns preinstalled in your handset.  
Preset Sounds: Select from melodies and sound effects preinstalled in your  
handset.  
To set the ringtone duration  
for incoming messages, select  
Received Message after Step  
3, press (Options) and select  
Jj  
My Sounds: Select from sound and video files stored in Data Folder.  
Ringtone Duration.  
6. Select a tone and press  
.
@
7. Press (Assign).  
J
Settings  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising the Vibration  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Silent, Car or  
Note  
Meeting and press (Options).  
J
When the mode settings is set to  
Silent and vibration is set to Off,  
your handset does not vibrate  
regardless of the settings for the  
Calendar (page 256) and Alarm  
(page 260).  
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Vibration and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Voice Call, Video Call or Received Message and press (Select).  
J
If you selected Silent in Step 1, select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a vibration pattern and press  
.
@
Personalising the Keypad Volume  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Keypad Volume and press (Select).  
J
4. Use  
to adjust the volume and press (OK).  
E
J
Settings  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising the Keypad Tone  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Keypad Tones and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Original 1 or Original 2 and press (Select).  
J
Personalising the Sound Effects Volume  
Set the volume level of each of the sound effects for turning on/off the power, opening/  
closing your handset and errors.  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Sound Effects Vol. and press (Select).  
J
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
5. Use  
to adjust the volume and press (OK).  
E
J
Settings  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising the Sound Effects  
Set each of the sound effects for turning on/off the power and opening/closing your  
handset.  
Note  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
Files containing pictures cannot be  
set as sound effects.  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Sound Effects and press (Select).  
J
4. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a type of tone and press (Select).  
J
Preset Pattern: Set the default sound effect.  
Preset Sounds: Select from melodies and sound effects preinstalled in your  
handset. Select a sound, press  
and then press (Assign).  
@
J
My Sounds: Select from sound files stored in Data Folder. Select a sound, press  
and then press (Assign).  
@
J
Settings  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising the Multimedia Volume  
Set the volume level for messaging, Vodafone live! and playing sound data in Data  
Folder.  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Multimedia Volume and press (Select).  
J
4. Use  
to adjust the volume and press (OK).  
E
J
Personalising the Battery Alarm  
When the battery level is very low and your handset is about to run out of power, the  
battery alarm tone plays. You can set whether to play the battery alarm tone.  
Tip  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Normal, Car or Meeting and  
When the mode settings is set to  
Silent, the battery alarm can only  
be heard from the earpiece during  
a call.  
press (Options).  
J
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Battery Alarm and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalising the Alarm Tone  
Set whether the alarm tone plays for Silent profile and Meeting profile.  
Note  
1. After Step 2 of “Switching Profiles” (page 209), select Silent or Meeting and press  
(Options).  
J
Whether an alarm tone plays in  
Normal profile and Car profile  
depends on the alarm (page 260)  
and Calendar (page 256) settings.  
2. Select Personalise and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Alarm and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Resetting Profiles  
Reset the settings of each profile.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, Select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Mode Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a profile and press (Options).  
J
4. Select Set to Default and press (Select).  
J
5. Enter your security code (page 54).  
6. Press (Yes).  
J
Settings  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Settings  
Setting the Wallpaper  
Set a picture preinstalled in your handset or taken with the camera as the wallpaper for  
standby mode.  
Tip  
If the picture you want to set as the  
wallpaper does not fit the window,  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
press (Options) after Step 6 and  
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
Jj  
J
perform one of the following  
operations.  
3. Select Main Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Wallpaper and press (Select).  
Cut: Trim the picture to fit the  
J
window.  
5. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Zoom: Enlarge or reduces the  
picture and then allows you to  
position and trim the picture.  
Fit to Width: Reduce the  
picture to fit the width of the  
window.  
Wallpaper List: Select from pictures preinstalled in your handset.  
My Pictures: Select from pictures stored in the Pictures folder of Data Folder.  
Off: Set no picture.  
Custom Screens: Set the picture set for the Custom Screens settings (page 218).  
Fit to Length: Reduce the  
picture to fit the height of the  
window.  
Rotate Image: Rotate the  
picture 90° anticlockwise and  
then allows you to trim the  
picture.  
6. Select a picture and press  
.
@
7. Press (Set/OK).  
J
Settings  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom Screens  
Change the wallpaper and the icons and background of the main menu.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
• If the wallpaper setting (page  
217) is set after the custom  
screens setting is set, the  
wallpaper set for the wallpaper  
setting is displayed.  
• If the custom screens setting is  
set after the wallpaper setting  
(page 217) is set, the wallpaper  
set for the custom screens  
setting is displayed.  
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Main Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Custom Screens and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a custom screen and press (View).  
J
6. Press (Set).  
J
Settings  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Incoming Display  
Set a picture to appear on the main display for incoming calls. You can also set whether  
the other party’s name appear on the external display for incoming calls.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Voice Call or Video Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Caller Details and press (Select).  
J
5. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Incoming Picture: Set the incoming picture. Set Preset Picture (default picture)  
or select a picture from My Pictures (pictures saved to the Pictures folder in Data  
Folder).  
Caller Picture: Display a picture associated with a caller in the Contacts list when  
a call is received from that caller. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Caller Info: Set the display of the name set for a caller in the Contacts list on  
the external display when a call is received from that caller. Select On or Off and  
press (Select).  
J
Settings  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Clock Display  
Setting the Clock Type Display for the Main Display  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Main Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Clock Type Display and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a clock type and press (Select).  
J
1-line Digital: Display the time and date in one-line digital view.  
2-line Digital: Display the time and date in two-line digital view.  
Analog (Home): Display an analog clock.  
World Clock: Display the city name and the time and date in one-line digital view  
for both the City1 and City2.  
Calendar: Display the calendar.  
Off: Display no time and date.  
Settings  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Wallpaper & Clock (External Display)  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select External Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Wallpaper & Clock and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a clock type and press (View).  
J
6. Press (Set).  
J
Switching between the 12-hour and 24-hour Clock  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Date&Time and press (Select).  
J
4. Select 12 hour/24 hour and press (Select).  
J
5. Select 12 hour or 24 hour and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Backlights  
Adjust the brightness and lighting time of the display backlights.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
The backlight for the external  
display lights when the backlight  
for the main display lights. The  
backlight for the main display  
lights when the backlight for the  
external display lights.  
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Main Display or External Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Backlight Settings and press (Select).  
J
If you selected External Display in Step 3, enter a lighting time and press (OK).  
J
5. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Brightness: Set the brightness of the main display backlight. Select Dark or  
Bright and press (Select).  
J
Lighting Time: Set the lighting time of the main display backlight. Enter a time (0  
to 60 seconds) and press (OK).  
J
Setting Operator Name Display  
Set whether to display the operator name in standby mode.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Main Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Operator Name and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Display Power Saving  
Save battery power by setting the handset to turn off the display after a specified time  
of inactivity elapses. You can also set the display time to 30 seconds, 1 minute or 3  
minutes.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Main Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Power Saving and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a display time and press (Select).  
J
Setting the Display of Cell Information  
You can set whether the cell information sent from a base station is displayed in standby  
mode when you use your handset on a mobile phone network based on Micro Cellular  
Network (MCN) technology.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Main Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Cell Information and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Contrast of the External Display  
Adjust the contrast of the external display to one of nine levels.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Display Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select External Display and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Contrast and press (Select).  
J
5. Close your handset.  
A window for adjusting the contrast appears on the external display.  
6. Use the side keys ( / ) to adjust the contrast, open your handset and press (OK).  
P Q  
J
Settings  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Settings  
Shortcut Keys  
This feature allows you to access a function from standby mode easily and quickly by  
pressing a side key ( ) or navigation key. You can change the functions accessed.  
P
Setting the Side Shortcut Key Function  
You can change the function accessed if you simply press and hold a side key ( ) from  
P
standby mode.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Shortcuts and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Side Up Key and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a function and press (Select).  
J
Profile Switch: Switch profiles (page 209).  
Answerphone: Set or cancel the answerphone (page 230).  
Torch: Turn on the mobile light (page 277).  
Settings  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Navigation Key Shortcuts  
You can change the functions accessed when you press the navigation keys  
,
,
A B  
Tip  
and  
from standby mode. The functions you can set are Shortcut menu (page  
D
C
254), Phonebook (page 86), Dialled Numbers (page 59) and Received Calls (page 59).  
To reset which functions are assigned  
to the navigation keys, select Set to  
Default after Step 5.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Shortcuts and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Navigation Keys and press (Select).  
J
5. Press (Options).  
J
6. Select Change and press (Select).  
J
7. Select the function you want to assign to  
8. Select the function you want to assign to  
9. Select the function you want to assign to  
and press (Select).  
A
B
D
J
and press (Select).  
J
and press (Select).  
J
The remaining function is assigned automatically to  
.
C
Settings  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External Light Settings  
Setting the Notification External Light  
If you have unchecked information (missed calls, unread messages and Voice Mail), the  
external light flashes when your handset is closed. You can select from three colours for  
the flashing of the external light or set the external light not to flash.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select External Light and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Notification and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Missed Calls, Messages or Voice Mail and press (Select).  
J
6. Select a colour and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Incoming External Light  
You can select from five colours for the external light that flashes when you have an  
incoming voice call, video call or message. You can also set the external light not to  
flash.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select External Light and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Incoming and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Voice Call, Video Call or Messaging and press (Select).  
J
6. Select a colour and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Offline Mode Setting  
Use offline mode to block signal reception and transmission without turning off the  
power. Offline mode disables the use of network services for making and receiving calls,  
sending and receiving messages, etc.  
Note  
You can still make calls to 110  
(police), 119 (fire and ambulance)  
and 118 (coast guard) when offline  
mode is set.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Phone Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Offline Mode and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On and press (Select).  
J
The  
indicator appears at the top of the display.  
Settings  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Settings  
Answerphone  
This feature can record a caller’s message when you are unable to answer a voice call.  
Your handset can store up to 3 messages and each message can be up to 15 seconds  
long.  
Setting the Answerphone  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Note  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
The answerphone is unavailable  
for video calls and call waiting.  
3. Select Answerphone and press (Select).  
4. Select Setting and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
The  
indicator appears on the standby window.  
You can also set the answerphone  
if you press and hold  
standby mode.  
in  
L/  
Setting the Ringing Duration  
1. After Step 3 of “Setting the Answerphone” (above), select Ringing Duration and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Enter the ringing duration (0 to 60 seconds) and press (OK).  
J
Settings  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing a Message  
1. After Step 3 of “Setting the Answerphone” (page 230), select Recordings and  
Tip  
press (Select).  
J
The Message list appears.  
• You can also display the  
Message list if you press  
standby mode.  
in  
L/  
2. Select a message and press  
.
@
• To delete a message, press  
(Options) after Step 1 and  
Jj  
select Delete.  
Setting the Auto Answer  
You can answer a call without having to press a key while the stereo handsfree headset  
is connected. You can also change the length of time before a call is answered.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Voice Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Auto Answer and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter the answer time (1 to 29 seconds) and press (OK).  
J
Settings  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Mute  
Mute the outgoing voice or both the outgoing voice and incoming voice for calls.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Voice Call or Video Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Mute and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Mute My Voice, Mute All or Off and press (Select).  
J
Using the stereo handsfree headset  
If you use the stereo handsfree headset with switch, simply pressing the switch of the  
stereo handsfree headset allows you to dial a preset phone number or answer a call  
without even opening your handset.  
1. Open the earphone microphone jack cover ( ).  
2. Insert the plug of the stereo handsfree headset into the earphone microphone jack  
(
).  
3WITCH  
Settings  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Phone Number  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Voice Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Earphone Call and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
6. Select the input method for the phone number and press (Select).  
J
Set Number: Directly enter a phone number.  
From Contacts: Select a phone number from the Contacts list (page 86).  
One-touch Calling  
1. In standby mode, press and hold the switch of the stereo handsfree headset.  
Short beeps are heard from the earphone and a call is made to the preset phone  
number.  
If you press and hold the switch again during dialling, a beep is heard and the call is  
cancelled.  
2. Press and hold the switch of the stereo handsfree headset to end the call.  
A beep is heard from the earphone and the call ends.  
Alternatively, you can press  
to end the call.  
O
Settings  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-touch Answering  
1. A call is received.  
2. Press and hold the switch of the stereo handsfree headset.  
Short beeps are heard from the earphone and a connection is established.  
If the caller made a video call, the video call begins.  
3. Press and hold the switch of the stereo handsfree headset to end the call.  
A beep is heard from the earphone and the call ends.  
Alternatively, you can press  
to end the call.  
O
Enabling/Disabling Incoming Voice Calls during  
Data Communication  
Set whether to receive incoming voice calls during data communication.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Voice Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Call Priority and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Enable or Disable and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using International Call Service  
When making an international call, you can simply add the international code (Vodafone  
international access code, 0046 + 010) and then select a country code from a list after  
entering the other party’s phone number. You can also change the international code  
and add entries to the country code list.  
Adding the International Code & Country Code  
1. In standby mode, enter a phone number and press (Options).  
J
2. Select International Call and press (Select).  
J
3. Select the country of the other party and press  
.
@
4. Select Japan or Abroad and press (Select).  
J
5. Press  
.
N
Changing the International Code  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Voice Call and press (Select).  
J
4. Select International Call and press (Select).  
J
5. Select International Code and press (Select).  
J
The current international code setting appears.  
To delete the international code, press and hold  
.
L
6. Enter a number and press (OK).  
J
Settings  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding an Entry to the Country Code List  
The country code list already includes the country codes of 17 countries. You can also  
edit and add entries. The list can contain up to 20 entries.  
Note  
To edit or delete an entry, select  
1. After Step 4 of “Changing the International Code” (page 235), select Country List  
the entry and press (Options).  
Jj  
and press (Select).  
J
However, only the entries for the  
three additional country codes can  
be deleted.  
2. Press (Options).  
J
3. Select Add and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter a country name and press  
.
@
5. Enter a country code and press (OK).  
J
Settings  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Caller ID  
Set whether to notify the other party of your phone number when you make a call.  
Automatically Hiding/Showing Caller ID  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
Even if Auto Prefix is set to Off,  
3. Select Voice Call and press (Select).  
J
you can press (Options) while a  
Jj  
phone number is displayed, select  
Hide My ID or Show My ID and  
then make a call.  
4. Select Prefix Settings and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Auto Prefix and press (Select).  
J
6. Select Hide My ID, Show My ID or Off and press (Select).  
J
Hiding Caller ID when Calling from Missed Calls  
You can set not to notify the other party of your phone number when you select and call  
a phone number in Missed Calls (page 59) that is not stored in the Contacts list.  
1. After Step 4 of “Automatically Hiding/Showing Caller ID” (above), select Hide to  
Missed Call and press (Select).  
J
2. Select On and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Earpiece/Speaker Volume  
Set the earpiece/speaker volume for voice calls and video calls.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Common Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a volume and press (Select).  
J
Earpiece Volume: Set the volume for sound heard from the earpiece.  
Speaker Volume: Set the volume for sound heard from the speaker.  
5. Use  
to adjust the volume and press (OK).  
E
J
While you are adjusting the volume, a confirmation tone is played to enable you to  
hear the volume level.  
Settings  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Open to Answer  
This feature allows you to answer an incoming call by simply opening your handset.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Common Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Open to Answer and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Setting the Any Key Answer  
This feature allows you to answer incoming calls with any key. If Any Key Answer is set  
to On, you can answer an incoming call with any of  
to Off, you can answer an incoming call with  
,
to  
,
,
. If it is set  
N 0 9 * #  
.
N
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Call Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Common Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Any Key Answer and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security Settings  
PIN Codes  
Set the various PIN code (page 40) settings used for USIM card security.  
Setting PIN1 Code Request  
Set whether to request the entering of your PIN1 code to perform verification each time  
a USIM card is inserted into the handset and the power is turned on.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select PIN1 Code Request and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On and press (Select).  
J
5. Enter your PIN1 code and press (OK).  
J
Changing PIN Codes  
Change the PIN1 code and PIN2 code (page 40).  
Note  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Set PIN1 Code Request to On  
before you change a PIN1 code.  
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Change PIN1 or Change PIN2 and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter your current PIN1 code or PIN2 code and press (OK).  
J
5. Enter your new PIN1 code or PIN2 code and press (OK).  
J
6. Re-enter your new PIN1 code or PIN2 code for confirmation and press (OK).  
J
Settings  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancelling PIN Lock  
If the PIN1 code or PIN2 code is incorrectly entered three times in a row, the PIN1/PIN2  
lock is set. You can cancel the PIN1/PIN2 lock by entering a personal unblocking key  
code (PUK1/PUK2 code). For details on the personal unblocking key codes, contact  
Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
Note  
If the PUK1/PUK2 code is incorrectly  
entered ten times in a row, the  
USIM lock is set. If the USIM lock is  
set, it cannot be cancelled. Contact  
Vodafone General Information (page  
315).  
1. Enter the PUK1/PUK2 code (page 40) in the PUK1/PUK2 code input window.  
2. Enter your new PIN1 code or PIN2 code and press (OK).  
J
3. Re-enter your new PIN1 code or PIN2 code for confirmation and press (OK).  
J
Changing the Security Code  
Change the security code (page 54) required to use some functions and modify the  
settings of your handset. The initial security code is “9999” or the four-digit number you  
selected when you concluded your contract.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Change Password and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter your current security code (page 54).  
5. Enter your new security code.  
6. Re-enter your new security code for confirmation.  
Settings  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Lock  
Note  
When the phone lock is activated,  
the information prompt (page 38)  
does not appear.  
Set Phone Lock to prevent others from using your handset. When Phone Lock is  
activated, your security code (page 54) is required to use the handset.  
Setting Phone Lock  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
When the phone lock is activated,  
you can still perform the following  
operations.  
Turn the power on and off.  
Enter the PIN1 code if the PIN1  
Code Request (page 240) is set  
to On.  
3. Select Phone Lock and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter your security code (page 54).  
5. Select an item and press (Select).  
J
Phone Closed: Phone Lock is activated when you close your handset.  
Power Saving: Activate Phone Lock when your handset goes into power saving  
Cancel the phone lock  
temporarily.  
mode.  
Make calls to 110 (police), 119  
(fire and ambulance) and 118  
(coast guard).  
Answer voice calls and video  
calls (but the Open to Answer  
and Any Key Answer functions  
are unavailable).  
Place calls on hold (page 56).  
Divert calls (page 65).  
Reject calls (page 56).  
Adjust the ringtone volume while  
a call is being received (page 56).  
Stop the alarm.  
Pause the V-appli (page 180) set  
to run in standby mode.  
Power On: Activate Phone Lock when the handset is powered on.  
6. Select On and press (Select).  
J
The indicator appears on the standby window when the Phone Lock is activated.  
Using Your Handset while Phone Lock is Activated  
To use your handset while Phone Lock is activated, enter your security code and press  
(OK).  
J
Settings  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rejecting Incoming Calls  
Rejecting Specific Incoming Calls  
Set your handset to reject calls with no Caller ID or calls from phone numbers not in the  
Contacts list.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Reject Calls and press (Select).  
J
4. Select a type of call and press (Select).  
J
Hidden: Reject calls with no Caller ID.  
Public Phone: Reject calls from pay phones.  
Unavailable: Reject calls for which the Caller ID cannot be displayed.  
Unknown: Reject calls from phone numbers not in the Contacts list.  
Select Contact: Reject calls from phone numbers in the Rejection list (page 244).  
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Phone Numbers to the Rejection List  
You can save up to 20 phone numbers to the Rejection list to reject calls from those  
phone numbers.  
Tip  
If a call is received from a phone  
number for which Reject Calls is  
set, the ringtone does not play and  
your handset does not vibrate, but  
the information prompt (page 38)  
appears and you can confirm the call  
in Missed Calls (page 59).  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Reject Calls and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Select Contact and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter your security code (page 54).  
7. Press (Add).  
J
8. Select the input method for the phone number and press (Select).  
J
From Phonebook: Select a phone number from the Contacts list (page 86).  
Set Number: Directly enter a phone number.  
From Call Log: Select a phone number from the call log (page 59).  
To add a second or subsequent phone number, press (Options) after Step 6,  
J
select Add and proceed from Step 8.  
Settings  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rejecting Messages  
Adding an Email Address or Phone Number to the Rejection  
List  
You can add up to 50 email addresses or phone numbers to the Rejection list to reject  
messages from those email addresses and phone numbers.  
Tip  
To check details or edit/delete an  
email address or phone number,  
select the email address or phone  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
number after Step 5 and press  
(Options).  
Jj  
3. Select Reject Addresses and press (Select).  
4. Select On and press (Select).  
J
5. Enter your security code (page 54).  
6. Press (Add).  
J
7. Select an input method for the email address or phone number and press  
(Select).  
J
From Contacts: Select an email address or phone number from the Contacts list  
(page 86).  
Enter Addresses: Directly enter an email address or phone number.  
To add a second or subsequent email address or phone number, press  
(Options) after Step 5, select Add and proceed from Step 7.  
J
Settings  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Secret Mode  
Set whether to show Contacts list entries saved as secret (page 82). Set secret mode  
to On if you want to show secret entries and set secret mode to Off if you want to hide  
secret entries.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Secret Mode and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter your security code (page 54).  
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
The indicator appears on the display.  
Fixed Dialling Numbers  
Restrict the making of calls and sending of messages to only phone numbers in the  
Fixed Dialling Number list of the USIM card.  
Note  
The Fixed Dialling Numbers setting  
is only available when you are  
using a USIM card that supports  
Fixed Dialling Numbers.  
Setting Fixed Dialling Numbers  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Fixed Dialling No. and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
4. Select Setting and press (Select).  
J
You can still make calls to 110  
(police), 119 (fire and ambulance)  
and 118 (coast guard) when Fixed  
Dialling Numbers is set to On.  
5. Enter your PIN2 code and press (OK).  
J
6. Select On and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Phone Numbers to the Fixed Dialling Number List  
The maximum number of phone numbers you can add to the Fixed Dialling Numbers list  
differs depending on the USIM card.  
Note  
Before performing this operation, set  
the Fixed Dialling Number setting to  
On beforehand (page 246).  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Security Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Fixed Dialling No. and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Edit Dial List and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
5. Select <Empty> and press (Add).  
J
To display details, make a call,  
create a message or delete/edit a  
phone number, select a phone  
number after Step 4 and press  
(Options).  
6. Enter your PIN2 code and press (OK).  
J
7. Select Name or Dial Number and press (Options).  
J
Jj  
8. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
9. Enter a name or phone number and press  
.
@
10. Press (Options) after setting the items.  
J
11. Select OK and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hold  
The hold of your handset allows you to disable the music player keys and side keys to  
prevent unintentional operations while your handset is closed.  
Tip  
• Until you cancel the hold, it is  
enabled each time you close  
your handset.  
• When the battery level is low,  
the hold is not set.  
Setting the Hold  
1. Press and hold when your handset is closed.  
R
The indicator appears on the external display.  
• You can operate your handset  
as usual when it is open.  
Cancelling the Hold  
1. Press and hold when your handset is closed.  
R
Settings  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Settings  
Initialising Your Handset  
You can delete all saved data such as Contacts list entries, Data Folder files and  
messages, as well as reset all function settings.  
Note  
This operation does not reset  
security code (page 54), USIM card  
data or memory card data.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Memory Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Phone Memory and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Clear Memory and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
5. Enter your security code (page 54).  
To view an approximate indication  
of the memory status for messages,  
Data Folder, Contacts list and  
Calendar, select Memory Status  
after Step 3.  
6. Press (Yes).  
J
Your handset is initialised and then automatically turned off and on.  
Settings  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Settings  
Application Settings  
Set and edit the network connection information for the browser, MMS and other  
applications individually.  
Setting the Network Connection Information  
You can set all the network connection information (network access point, proxy, etc.) for  
each application.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Network Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Browser/Java, MMS or Streaming and press (Select).  
J
5. Select <Empty> and press (Options).  
J
6. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
7. Select an item and press  
.
@
8. Enter/select information.  
For each item, press  
or (OK) and set the information.  
J
@
9. Press (Options) after the settings the items.  
J
10. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
11. Press (Yes).  
J
Settings  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet Settings  
Edit the network access point (NAP) information.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
To display, edit, copy or delete NAP  
information, select information after  
2. Select Network Settings and press (Select).  
J
Step 3 and press (Options).  
Jj  
3. Select Internet and press (Select).  
J
However, any profile indicated by  
cannot be displayed or copied.  
4. Select <Empty> and press (Add).  
J
5. Select an item and press  
.
@
6. Enter/select information.  
For each item, press  
or (OK) and set the information.  
J
@
7. Press (Options) after the settings the items.  
J
8. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
9. Press (Yes).  
J
Settings  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retrieving Network Information  
Before you can use Vodafone live!, you need to retrieve the network connection  
information.  
Tip  
The first time you turn on the  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
power after purchasing your handset,  
a prompt for retrieving network  
connection information appears if  
2. Select Network Settings and press (Select).  
J
J
3. Select Retrieve NW Info. and press (Select).  
you press  
,
,
or .  
a@ Jj Kk Aa  
4. Press (Yes).  
J
External Device Setting  
Set the access point name (APN) of the network information to write to your handset in  
order to perform packet communication from an external device such as a PC.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Network Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select External Device and press (Select).  
J
4. Select <Empty> and press (Options).  
J
5. Select Edit and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter the access point name and press (Options).  
J
7. Select OK and press (Select).  
J
8. Press (Yes).  
J
Settings  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location Settings  
Configure the settings for retrieving location information.  
Saving a Location Information URL  
Set a map provider for displaying maps from the Contacts list.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Location Settings and press (Select).  
J
3. Select URL Settings and press (Select).  
J
4. Select <Empty> and press (Edit).  
J
5. Enter the URL for retrieving location information and press  
.
@
Setting the Location Information URL  
1. After Step 3 of “Saving a Location Information URL(above), select a URL and press  
.
@
Location On/Off Setting  
1. After Step 2 of “Saving a Location Information URL(above), select Location On/Off  
and press (Select).  
J
2. Enter your security code (page 54).  
3. Select On or Off and press (Select).  
J
Settings  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shortcut Menu  
If you assign frequently used functions in the Shortcut menu, you can access them  
quickly and easily.  
Setting the Shortcut Menu  
1. In standby mode, press  
.
A
2. Select <Empty> and press  
.
@
3. Press (Yes).  
J
4. Select a function and press (Select).  
J
If you selected Data Folder or Contacts List, you can set a shortcut for a file,  
folder or Contacts list entry. Select the item you want to set.  
Accessing a Function from the Shortcut Menu  
1. In standby mode, press  
.
A
Tip  
Shortcut menu window appears.  
2. Select a function and press  
To edit a name, cancel a setting  
or switch the view (Thumbnail  
View/List View), select a function  
after Step 1 and press (Options).  
Jj  
.
@
Settings  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions  
Your handset includes various convenient functions.  
In This Chapter  
Calendar  
Alarms  
Number Memo  
World Clock  
Backup  
Multi Task  
Barcode  
Dictionary  
Calculator  
Converter  
Voice Recorder  
Countdown Timer  
Notepad  
Flashlight  
Sending Touch Tones  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calendar  
    
£ Ó \ Î ä  
Calendar allows you to save your appointments and use your handset as a scheduler.  
      
" V Ì Ê Ó ä ä È  
-Õ˜ ꢀœ˜ /Õi 7i` /ꢂÕ ꢇÀˆ ->Ì  
Adding a New Appointment  
You can save up to 100 appointments.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Calendar and press (Select).  
J
«
"
Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã  
> V Ž  
3. Press (Options).  
J
Month View Window  
4. Select New Appointment and press (Select).  
J
Note  
5. Select an item and press  
.
@
• If you change the Main City  
setting (page 52) in the clock  
settings, the start and end dates  
and times of appointments  
are automatically changed to  
those in the time zone of the  
city. Also, when DST (Daylight  
Saving Time) is set to On, the  
start and end dates and times  
are automatically changed for  
summer time.  
Title: Enter the title (up to 16 characters) of the appointment.  
Start Date&Time: Set the start date and time for the appointment. To set both  
the date and time, select Date&Time. To select only the date, select Date only.  
End Date&Time: Set the end date and time for the appointment.  
No Repeat/Daily/Weekly/Monthly/Yearly/End of Month: Set a repeat interval  
and period for the appointment. If you set Monthly for the 29th, 30th or 31st, the  
repeat is only set for months that include that date. If you set the start date to the  
last day of the month, you can set the setting to End of Month.  
Memo: Enter the contents (up to 128 characters) of the appointment.  
• When the mode settings (page  
209) is set to Silent or Meeting  
and the alarm is set to Off, the  
alarm does not play.  
Convenient Functions  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarm: Set the alarm. Select On and then set the alarm date and time, alarm  
Note  
tone, alarm volume and vibration. After setting the items, press (Options) and  
J
select Save.  
If the alarm time arrives while  
the power is off, the power turns  
on automatically and the alarm  
sounds. However, note that if PIN1  
Code Request (page 240) is set  
to On, calls and messages cannot  
be received until you enter the  
PIN1 code (page 40) to display the  
standby window after stopping the  
alarm.  
Location: Enter the location information (up to 50 characters).  
None Category/Meeting/Date/Travel/Holiday/Anniversary/Miscellaneous:  
Set the category of the appointment.  
6. Press (Options) after setting the items.  
J
7. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
Alarm Date & Time  
At the date and time set for an alarm, the alarm plays and “Appointment” appears in the  
external display. To stop the alarm, press any key. After the alarm stops, press (View)  
to check the appointment details.  
J
Tip  
If the time set for an alarm is  
reached during an incoming/  
outgoing voice call or video  
call, while taking a picture or  
recording a video or during  
data communication, the alarm  
plays after the call, taking of a  
picture, recording of a video or  
communication ends.  
Convenient Functions  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Appointments  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Calendar and press (Select).  
J
To switch the view between month,  
week, day and all appointments,  
press (Options) after Step 2 and  
select Calendar View.  
The month view window appears.  
Jj  
Press  
month.  
to switch to the previous month and press  
to switch to the next  
*
#
3. Use  
to select a date and press  
.
@
E
A list of appointments for the selected date appears.  
4. Select an appointment and press  
.
@
The details of the appointment appear.  
Convenient Functions  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing Appointments  
You can perform the following operations if you select a date or appointment and press  
Tip  
(Options) from the month, week, day or all appointments view.  
J
The items displayed vary  
depending on the Calendar  
view.  
View: Display the details of the selected appointment.  
Day View: Display a list of appointments set for the selected date.  
Edit: Edit the appointment.  
Delete: Delete the appointment.  
Go to Date: Enter a date and then display the appointments for that date.  
To save an edited appointment  
as a new appointment without  
overwriting the original  
appointment, press (Options)  
Jj  
and select Save as.  
Select Multi: Select multiple appointments in all appointments view and then  
delete or export them. To select or unselect appointments, select an appointment  
with the cursor and press  
Mark all/Unmark all.  
or press (Options) and select Mark/Unmark or  
@
J
Send vCalendar: Convert the appointment to vCalendar format and then save it  
to Data Folder or a memory card or attach it to an MMS message (page 148). You  
can also send it via Bluetooth™ communication (page 285).  
Lock Calendar: Lock the calendar. To set or cancel the lock, enter your security  
code (page 54).  
Holiday Setting: Change the colour for displaying a specified date or day of the  
week.  
Calendar View: Switch the view between month, week, day and all appointments.  
Convenient Functions  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarms  
Set an alarm to play at a certain time.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Tools and press (Select).  
Note  
@
J
• If the alarm time arrives while  
the power is off, the power  
turns on automatically and the  
alarm sounds. However, note  
that if PIN1 Code Request (page  
240) is set to On, calls and  
messages cannot be received  
until you enter the PIN1 code  
(page 40) to display the standby  
window after stopping the  
alarm.  
2. Select Alarm and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an alarm and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On and press (Select).  
J
The alarm settings window appears.  
5. Select an item and press  
.
@
Alarm Name: Enter an alarm name. After you enter a name, press  
Alarm Time: Enter an alarm time in accordance with the 24-hour system. After  
.
@
• When the mode settings (page  
209) is set to Silent or Meeting  
and the alarm is set to Off, the  
alarm does not play.  
you enter a time, press (OK).  
J
Alarm Tone: Set the following items. Select an item and press  
. After setting  
@
the items, press (Options) and select Save.  
J
Alarm Tone: Set a sound preinstalled in your handset or a sound or video  
saved to Data Folder as the alarm tone. For details on how to set a tone, see  
from Step 5 of “Personalising the Ringtone” (page 211).  
Alarm Volume: Set the alarm volume.  
Vibration: Set the alarm vibration.  
Convenient Functions  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeat: Set the alarm to repeat at a specified interval. Select one of the following  
items and press (Select).  
J
Everyday: Start the alarm everyday.  
• Weekdays: Start the alarm each day from Monday to Friday.  
• Select Day: Specify which days to start the alarm. Press  
to remove a  
@
check mark, press (Options) and select OK.  
J
• Once: Start the alarm once only on a specified day. To specify a day, press  
F
or  
and press (OK).  
G
J
Snooze: Set the snooze. If the snooze is set to On, the alarm plays in five minute  
intervals up to five times.  
6. Press (Options) after setting the items.  
J
7. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
The indicator appears in standby mode and the alarm is set.  
Alarm Time  
At a time set for an alarm, the alarm plays and the time-up window appears. To stop the  
alarm, press any key (excluding the music player keys).  
Tip  
If the snooze is set, select Stop Snooze in the information prompt (page 38) and press  
If the time set for an alarm is  
reached during an incoming/  
outgoing voice call or video  
call, while taking a picture or  
recording a video or during  
data communication, the alarm  
plays after the call, taking of a  
picture, recording of a video or  
communication ends.  
(Select) and then press (Yes) to stop the snooze.  
J
J
Convenient Functions  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dictionary  
Look up the meaning of words in an electronic dictionary.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Dictionary and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a dictionary and press (Select).  
J
Japanese: Input a Japanese word (kanji or reading) to look up its meaning in  
Japanese.  
English-Japanese: Input an English word to look up its meaning in Japanese.  
Japanese-English: Enter a Japanese word (kanji or reading) to look up its meaning  
in English.  
4. Press (Options).  
J
5. Select Word Search and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter a keyword and press  
.
@
7. Select a word and press  
.
@
Convenient Functions  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calculator  
Use your handset as a calculator.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Calculator and press (Select).  
J
Follow the onscreen instructions to enter digits.  
Press  
to enter a decimal point and use  
to switch between + and -.  
*
N
Calculator Operations  
You can perform the following operations if you press (Options) from the Calculator  
window.  
J
Tip  
To calculate the tax rate from the  
=: Repeat the last arithmetic operation.  
Clear All: Delete the input value and data stored in memory.  
MS: Save the input value to memory.  
M+: Add the input value to the value stored in memory.  
MR: Display the value stored in memory.  
%: Calculate the percentage.  
1/X: Calculate the reciprocal.  
SQRT: Calculate the square root.  
Set Tax Rate: Set the tax rate. To change the tax rate, enter a new rate and press  
Calculator window, press . To  
Hh  
display the result of the tax rate  
calculation in red, press once.  
Hh  
To display the amount including  
tax in green, press again.  
Hh  
(OK).  
J
Convenient Functions  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Converter  
Set a currency exchange rate and then perform currency conversion calculations.  
1. In standby mode, press , select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Converter and press (Select).  
J
3. Select the Exchange rate input field and enter the exchange rate.  
To enter a decimal point, press  
.
*
4. Select the Amount input field and enter an amount.  
To enter a decimal point, press  
.
*
5. Press (Result).  
J
The conversion result appears.  
Convenient Functions  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice Recorder  
The voice recorder allows you to record sound and then save the recording data to the  
Recordings folder in the Melody&Music folder of Data Folder. Although the possible  
length of recording time depends on the amount of available memory space in Data  
Folder, the maximum recording time is 90 minutes for each recording.  
Recording Sound  
Note  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
If a call is received during  
recording, the call takes priority  
and recording stops. All recording  
data is saved automatically. To  
prohibit the reception of calls  
during recording, set offline mode  
(page 229).  
2. Select Voice Recorder and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Record and press (Select).  
J
The Recording window appears.  
4. Press (Options).  
J
The default storage place for recording data is handset memory. To switch the  
storage place to a memory card, select Save sound to and then select Memory  
Card.  
Tip  
5. Select Record and press (Select).  
J
To stop recording and save all  
recording data automatically,  
Recording begins.  
press  
.
a@  
6. Press (Pause) to pause recording.  
J
To resume recording, press  
.
@
To save the recording data, press (Save).  
J
Convenient Functions  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Recordings  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
Tip  
2. Select Voice Recorder and press (Select).  
J
To play recording data saved to a  
3. Select Recordings and press (Select).  
J
memory card, press (Options)  
Jj  
and select Memory Card after  
The contents of the Recordings folder in the Melody&Music folder of Data Folder  
appear.  
Step 3.  
4. Select a recording data and press (Options).  
J
5. Select Play and press (Select).  
J
Convenient Functions  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Countdown Timer  
You can set an alarm to notify you when a certain amount of time elapses. The alarm  
plays for approximately one minute.  
Tip  
The level of the alarm volume is  
that set for the Multimedia Volume  
setting (page 215) of the mode  
settings currently set. If the mode  
settings is set to Silent, no sound  
is emitted for the alarm. Your  
handset vibrates only.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Countdown Timer and press (Select).  
J
3. Enter a start time (10 seconds to 60 minutes) and press (OK).  
J
4. Press (Start).  
J
The timer starts.  
To stop the timer, press (Stop). To restart the timer, press (Restart). To reset  
J
J
the timer, press (Reset) while the timer is stopped.  
K
Convenient Functions  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notepad  
Use your handset as a notepad for storing text input. You can also access the saved data  
during character input and editing. You can enter up 256 characters for each memo and  
store up to 20 memos in the notepad.  
Note  
To edit or delete a memo, select  
the memo after Step 2 and press  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
(Options).  
Jj  
2. Select Notepad and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a position and press  
.
@
4. Enter the contents of the memo and press  
.
@
Convenient Functions  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Number Memo  
Use the keypad to take a memo of a phone number or other number during a voice or  
video call. After the call ends, you can save the number to the Contacts list or use it to  
create a message or make a call.  
Taking a Memo of a Phone Number  
1. Press keys on the keypad during a call.  
Tip  
• To enter a pause (P), press (Options) and select Pause.  
J
• You can enter a total of up to  
40 numbers and symbols ( , #,  
• To enter a hyphen, press (Options) and select Manual Hyphen.  
J
*
2. Press (Options).  
J
+,-, P).  
Any number you enter is saved  
automatically after the call ends.  
3. Select Number Memo and press (Select).  
J
The number memo is saved.  
• If there are already five number  
memos, the oldest memo is  
deleted each time a new memo  
is saved.  
Viewing a Number Memo  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Number Memo and press (Select).  
J
The saved number memos appear. You can select a phone number in a number  
memo and make a voice or video call or save the phone number to the Contacts list.  
Convenient Functions  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
World Clock  
World Clock Viewer allows you to check the date and local time in major cities around  
the world, as well as the time difference.  
Tip  
If you press (DSTon) after Step  
Jj  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
3, the time switches to Daylight  
Saving Time (DST) and the  
indicator appears on the display.  
2. Select World Clock and press (Select).  
J
World Clock Viewer appears.  
3. Use  
to select a city.  
F
The date, local time and time difference for the selected city appear.  
The green longitude line on the map indicates the position of the city set for City 1.  
The red longitude line indicates the position of the city set for City 2.  
For details on changing the City 1 and City 2 settings, see “World Clock Setting” (page  
51).  
Convenient Functions  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backup  
Backing Up Data to a Memory Card  
1. Insert a memory card in the slot of your handset.  
Note  
2. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
Do not use a PC or other device  
to view or change a backup file in  
a memory card. The file may be  
damaged.  
3. Select Backup and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Backup and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a data and press  
.
@
A check mark is added to the check box.  
Contacts List: Back up the Contacts list.  
Calendar: Back up the Calendar.  
6. Press (Options).  
J
7. Select Backup and press (Select).  
J
8. Enter your security code (page 54).  
9. Press (Yes).  
J
10. Press (Yes) or (No) in accordance with the confirmation window.  
J
K
Press (Yes) to include pictures or press (No) to not include pictures when  
J
K
backing up the Contacts list and press (Yes) to include past appointments or  
J
press (No) to not include past appointments when backing up the Calendar.  
K
Offline mode is set and the data begins to be backed up to the memory card. When  
the backing up of data is complete, offline mode is cancelled.  
Convenient Functions  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restoring Data from a Memory Card  
1. Insert a memory card in the slot of your handset.  
Tip  
2. In standby mode, press  
, select Tools and press (Select).  
@
J
To delete one or all backup files,  
press (Options) after Step 5 and  
select Delete or Delete All.  
3. Select Backup and press (Select).  
J
Jj  
4. Select Restore and press (Select).  
J
5. Select a data and press (Select).  
J
Contacts List: Display a list of Contacts list backup files.  
Calendar: Display a list of Calendar backup files.  
6. Select a backup file and press  
.
@
7. Enter your security code (page 54).  
8. Press (Yes).  
J
9. Press (Yes) or (No) in accordance with the confirmation window.  
J
K
Press (Yes) to overwrite all the data in the restore destination and press (No) to  
J
K
add the data.  
Offline mode is set and the Contacts list or calendar begins to be imported to your  
handset. When the importing of data is complete, offline mode is cancelled.  
Convenient Functions  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi Task  
This feature allows you to run multiple functions (applications) simultaneously and  
switch between them.  
Note  
Starting a New Application  
• Multi task cannot be used  
while a V-appli (except for  
Screensaver) is running.  
• Another application may not be  
able to be started while some  
applications are running.  
• The following applications can  
be started from the Multi Task  
window.  
Start another application without ending the application you are using.  
1. Press while an application is in use.  
S
The Multi Task window appears.  
2. Select Tools and press (Select).  
J
3. Select an application and press (Select).  
J
The selected application starts.  
• Calendar • Countdown Timer  
• Alarm  
• Notepad  
Switching Applications  
• Dictionary • Number Memo  
• Calculator • World Clock  
• Converter • Backup  
• Voice Recorder  
1. Press while an application is in use.  
S
The Multi Task window appears.  
2. Select an application and press  
.
@
The application is switched to the selected application.  
Note  
A V-appli cannot be resumed while  
another application is running. End  
the application.  
Convenient Functions  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Barcode  
The camera allows you to scan barcodes (QR codes). You can connect to a URL included  
in the scanned information or create a message to send to an address included in the  
scanned information. You can save up to ten scanned data items. However, this number  
depends on the amount of available memory space. When a barcode has been divided  
into data areas, you can scan up to 16 data areas consecutively.  
QR Code  
Note  
• Some barcodes cannot be  
scanned.  
• The camera may not be able to  
scan a barcode that is dirty or  
in a shadow.  
Convenient Functions  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning a Barcode  
Attach the Macro lens (page 139) before scanning a QR code.  
Tip  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Camera and press (Select).  
@
J
• If the scanned data begins  
with MAILTO:, press  
Step 4 to create an SMS/MMS  
message. If it begins with  
MEMORY:, you can save it to  
the Contacts list (page 79).  
2. Select Scan Data and press (Select).  
J
after  
a@  
The scan QR code window appears.  
3. Frame a barcode in the main display.  
To adjust the exposure, use  
. Press  
to make the barcode darker and  
F
D
• If you select the text of a link  
(indicated by a blue underline)  
press  
to make the barcode lighter.  
C
4. Press  
.
@
and press  
, you can make  
@a  
a call, create a message,  
save data to the Contacts list,  
connect to a URL, etc. If the  
scanned data contains image  
or sound data, you can display/  
play the data, save the data to  
Data Folder, etc.  
Scanning begins.  
The scanned data appears in the display. If the barcode has been divided, scan the  
other data areas.  
To save the data, press (Options) and select Save.  
J
Convenient Functions  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saved Barcodes  
1. After Step 2 of “Scanning a Barcode” (page 275), press (Options).  
J
Tip  
2. Select Scanned Data List and press (Select).  
J
To rename or delete scanned data,  
press (Options) after Step 2.  
3. Select a scanned data and press  
.
@
Jj  
The barcode data appears.  
For details on the operations you can perform while barcode data is displayed, see  
“Scanning a Barcode” (page 275).  
Convenient Functions  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flashlight  
When the Flashlight function has been assigned to a side key ( ) in the shortcut settings  
P
Note  
(page 225), you can turn on the mobile light if you press and hold the side key ( ).  
P
• Do not turn on the mobile light  
1. Press and hold a side key ( ).  
P
while it is close to anyone  
eyes as doing so may damage  
the person s eyesight. Also,  
s  
The mobile light turns on and remains lit while you hold the side key ( ).  
P
check the direction with which  
light will be emitted before  
turning on the mobile light.  
• If the side key ( ) is set to  
Pp  
another function (page 225),  
this function is unavailable.  
While the phone lock is  
activated (page 242) or the Hold  
is set (page 248), the mobile  
light cannot be turned on.  
Convenient Functions  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Touch Tones  
Send touch tones to use interactive voice response services and other types of touch-  
tone services.  
Sending Individual Touch Tones  
1. Press any of the  
to  
,
and  
keys during a call.  
0
9 *  
#
Using the Pause (P) for Sending Touch Tones  
The pause (P) allows you to send sequences of touch tones, each separated with a  
pause (P). The Contacts list is useful for storing sequences of touch tones for remotely  
operating your home answering machine and other devices. You can send up to 40  
touch tones at one time.  
Saving Touch Tones to the Contacts List  
Example: Save the following three numbers.  
Phone number: 03-123X-XXX3  
Answering machine code: #7777  
Answering machine playback code: #1  
1. Save 03123XXXX3P#7777P#1 as the phone number of an entry.  
To enter a pause (P), press (Options) and select Pause.  
J
Convenient Functions  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Touch Tones  
1. Open a Contacts list entry containing the touch tones.  
2. Press  
.
N
A call is made to the phone number before the first “P.”  
3. Press (Tone).  
J
The sequence of touch tones before the next “P” is sent.  
Repeat this step until all the touch tones have been sent.  
Convenient Functions  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Transfer  
You can use Bluetooth™ or a USB cable to transfer data between your handset and other  
handsets, PCs and other devices.  
In This Chapter  
Bluetooth™  
USB Cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bluetooth™  
Transfer the data of the Contacts List, Calendar and Data Folder between your handset  
and Bluetooth™ compatible PCs and handsets. Bluetooth™ also allows you to use a  
wireless headset or an in-car device for handsfree calls. We recommend using Bluetooth  
™ while your handset and the other device are within 10 metres of each other. For  
details on the operating procedures of the other device, refer to the instruction manual  
for that device.  
Note  
The USB functions cannot be  
started or set during Bluetooth  
™ communication. If a USB  
cable is connected, Bluetooth™  
communication ends.  
About Bluetooth™  
Bluetooth™ is a technology that facilitates wireless communication between PCs and  
devices such as handsfree compatible devices.  
About the Authentication PIN Code  
The authentication PIN code (any 4 to 16 digits) is for connecting to other Bluetooth™  
compatible devices. When registering a device, the same authentication PIN code needs  
to be entered for both the sending and receiving devices.  
Activating Bluetooth™  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Connectivity and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Bluetooth and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Switch On/Off and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
The indicator appears at the top of the display.  
File Transfer  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering a Bluetooth™ Enabled Device  
Before establishing a Bluetooth™ connection, you need to search then register the  
Bluetooth™ enabled device. You can register up to 20 detected Bluetooth™ devices.  
Note  
A PIN code (4 to 16 digits) needs  
to be entered within approximately  
30 seconds for security reasons.  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select Paired Devices and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select Search and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a Bluetooth™ enabled device from the detected devices and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter a PIN code (4 to 16 digits) and press (OK).  
J
When the same PIN code is entered in the Bluetooth™ enabled device, that device  
is registered.  
Setting a Bluetooth™ Compatible Device as a Trusted Device  
If you set a registered Bluetooth™ compatible device as a trusted device, a confirmation  
window is not displayed and a connection is established when a connection request is  
received from that device.  
Tip  
To cancel this setting for a device  
you no longer want to trust, select  
Off in Step 4.  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select Paired Devices and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select a Bluetooth™ compatible device and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Trust Device and press (Select).  
J
4. Select On and press (Select).  
J
File Transfer  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Details of a Registered Bluetooth™ Compatible  
Device  
Display the device name, device address, device class and supported profiles of a  
Bluetooth™ compatible device.  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select Paired Devices and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select a Bluetooth™ compatible device and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Details and press (Select).  
J
Changing the Name of a Registered Bluetooth™ Compatible  
Device  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select Paired Devices and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select a Bluetooth™ compatible device and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Rename and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter your security code (page 54).  
5. Change the name and press  
.
@
Deleting a Registered Bluetooth™ Compatible Device  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select Paired Devices and  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select a Bluetooth™ compatible device and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Delete and press (Select).  
J
File Transfer  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Response to Detection by Other Bluetooth™ Compatible Devices  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select My Phone ID and press  
Tip  
(Select).  
J
You may still receive a connection  
request even if Visibility is set to  
Hide My Phone.  
2. Select Visibility and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Show My Phone or Hide My Phone and press (Select).  
J
Show My Phone: Allow your handset to be recognised when it is detected during  
a search by a Bluetooth™ compatible device in the vicinity.  
Hide My Phone: Prevent your handset from being recognised when it is detected  
during a search by a Bluetooth™ compatible device in the vicinity.  
Displaying Details of Your Handset  
Display the device name, device address, device class and supported profiles of your  
handset.  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select My Phone ID and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select My Phone and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Details and press (Select).  
J
File Transfer  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Name of Your Handset  
You can change the name displayed on another Bluetooth™ compatible device when  
your handset is detected.  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select My Phone ID and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select My Phone and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Rename and press (Select).  
J
4. Enter your security code (page 54).  
5. Change the name and press  
.
@
Using Bluetooth™ for Sending Data  
Note  
1. Set up the other Bluetooth™ compatible device to receive data.  
The following files cannot be sent.  
Files in V-appli, My Saved Pages  
and Templates of Data Folder  
2. Select Via Bluetooth from the Options menu of a function and press (Select).  
J
Offline mode is set during the sending of data.  
Files without transfer permission  
3. Select the receiving Bluetooth™ enabled device and press (Select).  
J
When the data is sent, offline mode is cancelled.  
Tip  
• To send the owner information  
of the Contacts list, select Send  
My vCard from the Phonebook  
menu (page 78) and then select  
Via Bluetooth.  
• If the receiving device is not  
registered, select Search and  
then select the receiving device.  
File Transfer  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Bluetooth™ for Receiving Data  
When Bluetooth™ is activated (page 281), you can receive data.  
Tip  
1. Press (Yes) when a confirmation window appears after a connection request is  
J
Files are saved to their appropriate  
locations by extensions.  
received from a Bluetooth™ compatible device in the vicinity.  
Your handset is in offline mode while receiving data.  
2. Select Save and press (Select).  
J
To reject the file, select Reject.  
3. Select To Phone Memory or To Memory Card and press (Select).  
J
Connecting to a Handsfree Compatible Device  
Note  
If a call is received while a  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select Paired Devices and  
handsfree compatible device  
is connected, the ringtone for  
handsfree calls plays. When  
some Bluetooth™ compatible  
devices are used, the ringtone  
for handsfree calls may be heard  
from both your handset and the  
handsfree compatible device.  
press (Select).  
J
2. Select the handsfree compatible device and press (Select).  
J
3. Select Connect and press (Select).  
J
Tip  
To perform handsfree  
communication, the handsfree  
compatible device needs to  
be registered. For details, see  
“Registering a Bluetooth™  
Enabled Device” (page 282).  
File Transfer  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Handsfree  
You can set the mode for making and receiving calls while a handsfree compatible  
device is connected.  
1. After Step 3 of “Activating Bluetooth™” (page 281), select My Phone ID and press  
(Select).  
J
2. Select Handsfree Setting and press (Select).  
J
3. Select a mode and press (Select).  
J
Handsfree Mode: Make and receive handsfree calls from your handset.  
Private Mode: Make and receive regular calls from your handset.  
Using Bluetooth™ for Dial-up Connections  
When Bluetooth™ is enabled, you can establish a dial-up connection.  
1. Press (Yes) when a confirmation window appears after a connection request is  
J
Tip  
received from a Bluetooth™ compatible device in the vicinity.  
Depending on the settings of  
the Bluetooth™ compatible  
device, a window for entering the  
authentication PIN code (any 4  
to 16 digits) appears. Enter the  
same authentication PIN code on  
your handset and the Bluetooth™  
compatible device.  
2. Enter a PIN code (4 to 16 digits) and press (OK).  
J
File Transfer  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Cable  
Use a USB cable to connect your handset to a PC and then exchange Contacts list,  
Calendar and Data Folder files. You can also use the supplied music transfer software to  
transfer music files and playlists from a PC to the memory card of your handset. Before  
connecting the USB cable, install the USB host driver and My Mobile (included in the  
supplied CD-ROM) on your PC. This function supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0. For details  
on the PC operating environment required to use this function, refer to My Mobile Quick  
Guide (included in the supplied CD-ROM).  
Note  
• When using a USB cable to  
connect your handset to a PC,  
be sure to directly insert the  
plug of the USB cable into the  
USB port of the PC.  
The Bluetooth™ communication  
cannot be started or set during  
USB functions.  
File Transfer  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transferring Music from a PC to a Memory Card  
Transfer music files and playlists from a PC to a memory card. Before connecting the  
USB cable, install the music transfer software (included in the supplied CD-ROM) on  
your PC. All music files transferred to your handset using the music transfer software  
are stored in the Beat Engine Box of the memory card. You can access the Beat Engine  
Box from the Music tab (page 96) of the Media Player menu.  
Using Music Transfer Mode to Connect to a PC  
To transfer music files from a PC to your handset, you need to use music transfer mode  
to establish a connection between the PC and your handset.  
Note  
• Offline mode (page 229) is set  
while your handset is in music  
transfer mode.  
In the following cases, your  
handset does not switch to  
music transfer mode when you  
connect it to a PC via a USB  
cable.  
1. Open your handset, display the standby window and use the USB cable to connect  
your handset to the PC.  
A confirmation window for switching to music transfer mode appears.  
2. Press (Yes).  
J
Your handset switches to music transfer mode, then connects to the PC. You are  
now ready to transfer music files.  
The phone lock is activated.  
Your handset is closed.  
The display setting of the  
confirmation window  
(page 291) is set to  
Do not Display.  
• You can also switch to music  
transfer mode from the main  
menu (page 290).  
File Transfer  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching to Music Transfer Mode from the Main Menu  
Switch to music transfer mode from the main menu.  
Note  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (select).  
@
J
• Connect the PC and your  
handset by USB cable before  
you switch to music transfer  
mode.  
2. Select Connectivity and press (Select).  
J
3. Select USB and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Music Transfer (Select).  
J
• Offline mode (page 229) is set  
while your handset is in music  
transfer mode.  
Your handset switches to music transfer mode.  
Transferring Music Files  
After you use music transfer mode to establish a connection between the PC and your  
handset (page 289), use the music transfer software to transfer music files. When the  
transfer is complete, disconnect your handset from the PC. For details on operating the  
PC or the music transfer software, refer to the corresponding manual.  
Updating Music File Information  
Update the file management information of music files transferred from a PC.  
Note  
1. Display the Music tab (page 96) of the Media Player menu, select Beat Engine Box  
• Offline mode (page 229) is set  
during updating.  
• This function cannot be used if  
the battery level is low, except  
during charging.  
and press (Select).  
J
2. Select Update List and press (Select).  
J
3. Press (Yes).  
J
The music file information is updated.  
File Transfer  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Display of the Music Transfer Mode Confirmation Window  
Set whether to display the confirmation window for switching to music transfer mode  
(page 289).  
Note  
If Do not Display is set for the  
display setting of the confirmation  
window for switching to music  
transfer mode, the window does  
not appear even if a USB cable is  
connected to your handset from  
standby mode. You can also switch  
to music transfer mode from the  
main menu (page 290).  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Connectivity and press (Select).  
J
3. Select USB and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Confirmation and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Display or Do not Display and press (Select).  
J
Using a USB Cable for Sending Data  
Send the data of the Contacts list, Calendar and Data Folder.  
Note  
1. Follow the procedure below to connect your handset and a PC with a USB cable.  
The following files cannot be sent.  
1) Open the external connector cover of your handset.  
2) Insert the plug of the USB cable into the external connector.  
3) Connect the USB cable to the USB port of the PC.  
Files in V-appli, My Saved  
Pages and Templates of Data  
Folder  
Files without transfer permission  
2. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
3. Select Connectivity and press (Select).  
J
4. Select USB and press (Select).  
J
5. Select Data Transfer and press (Select).  
J
6. Enter your security code (page 54).  
Offline mode is set. Your handset is ready to send data.  
7. Follow the instructions on the PC.  
You may need to enter your security code (page 54) on your handset.  
File Transfer  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a USB Cable for Receiving Data  
Receive data to the Contacts list, Calendar and Data Folder.  
1. After Step 6 of “Using a USB Cable for Sending Data” (page 291), follow the  
instructions on the PC to send data from the PC to your handset.  
Using a USB Cable for Backing Up Data  
Back up files and folders in Pictures, Videos, Melody&Music and Other Files of Data  
Folder.  
Note  
Files that cannot be transferred  
are not backed up.  
1. After Step 6 of “Using a USB Cable for Sending Data” (page 291), follow the  
instructions on the PC to back up data from your handset to the PC.  
You may need to enter your security code (page 54) on your handset.  
Using a USB Cable for Restoring Data  
Restore Pictures, Videos, Melody&Music and Other Files of Data Folder saved on a PC to  
your handset.  
Note  
• All the data may not be able to be  
restored from some backup files.  
• All the data of the restore  
destination is overwritten.  
1. After Step 6 of “Using a USB Cable for Sending Data” (page 291), follow the  
instructions on the PC to restore data from the PC to your handset.  
You may need to enter your security code (page 54) on your handset.  
Using a USB Cable for Dial-up Connections  
Use a USB cable to connect your handset to a PC and then access the Internet, etc. For  
details on the configuration/operation of the PC modem, refer to the instruction manual  
for the PC.  
File Transfer  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a USB Cable for Charging  
While your handset is on, you can charge the battery pack if you connect your handset  
and a PC using a USB cable.  
Note  
• Charging is not possible while  
your handset is turned off.  
• Charging may not be possible  
depending on the connection  
settings of the PC.  
1. In standby mode, press  
, select Settings and press (Select).  
@
J
2. Select Connectivity and press (Select).  
J
3. Select USB and press (Select).  
J
4. Select Battery Charge and press (Select).  
J
5. Select On and press (Select).  
J
File Transfer  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
In This Chapter  
Default Settings  
Troubleshooting  
Storage Capacity  
Main Specifications  
Glossary  
Index  
Warranty & After Sales Service  
Customer Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Settings  
Function Name  
Default Setting  
Page  
Entertainment V-appli  
Screensavers: Off, Set Time (Start Time: 3 sec, Duration: No Timeout), Priority Settings 180-185  
(Voice Calls: Voice Calls, Video Calls: Video Calls, Messages: Messages, Alarms: Alarms),  
Backlight (Backlight: Same as Phone, Blinking: On), Volume: Level 3, Vibration: On  
Vodafone live!  
CAST  
Browser Settings  
187-191  
Text Browser (Image: Show, Sound: Unmute), Font Size: Standard, Cookie Settings: On, 179  
Manufacture No.: Off, Auto Launch: Off, Location Property: Ask every time, Encoding  
Type: Auto  
Media Player  
Camera  
Play Mode: All, BASS: BASS Off, Volume: Level 6, Screen Display: Normal Screen  
(when up to H144×W176)/Full Screen (when larger than H144×W176)  
96-104  
Camera Settings Picture Quality: Fine, Picture Size (Digital Camera: W1280×H960, Mobile Camera:  
W240×H320), Picture Effects: Off, Preview: On, Date Stamp: Off, Grid: Off, File Name:  
Date&Time, Shutter Sound: Pattern 1, Keypad Shortcut: On, Camera Mode: Mobile  
Camera, Night Mode: Off, Multi Shots: Off, Add Frame: Off, Save Image to: Phone  
Memory, Delay Timer: Off, Mobile Light: Off, White Balance: Auto, Colour Control:  
Neutral Colour, Exposure Control: 0.0EV  
121-131,  
136-144  
Appendix  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
Default Setting  
Page  
Camera  
Video Settings Video Quality: Normal, Effects: Off, Preview: On, Screen Display: Normal, Controller  
Display: On, File Name: Date&Time, Start/End Sounds: Pattern 1, Keypad Shortcut: On,  
Record Mode: For MMS, Voice Record: On, Save Video to: Phone Memory, Delay Timer:  
Off, Mobile Light: Off, White Balance: Auto, Colour Control: Neutral Colour, Exposure  
Control: 0.0EV, Video Encode: MPEG4 (Japan)  
132-144  
Scan Data  
Receiving  
Exposure Control: 0.0EV  
274-276  
146-170  
Messaging  
Retrieve Mode (Home Network: Deferred, Roaming Network: Deferred), Auto-extract  
Settings (MMS) File (Picture: On, Sound: On), Reply for Delivery: On, Anonymous Msg.: Reject  
Sending Delivery Report: Off, Delivery Time: Immediate, Expiry Time: Off, MMS Signature: No  
Settings (MMS) Text, MMS Priority: Normal  
SMS Settings  
Delivery Report: Off, SMS Signature: No Text  
3D Pict. Settings Auto Play: Unread Only, Colour Settings: Random  
Common  
Settings  
Reply Settings: Always Ask, Display Font Size: Standard, Page Scroll: 1 Line  
Received Msgs. Auto-delete: Off  
Sent Messages Auto-delete: On  
Data Folder  
Thumbnail View (Pictures and Videos folders only)  
193-207  
Appendix  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
Calendar  
Default Setting  
Page  
Tools  
Appointment: Unset, Alarm (Alarm: Off, Alarm Tone: Pattern 1, Alarm Volume: Level 3, 256-259  
Vibration: Pattern 1), Lock Calendar: Off, Holiday Settings (Sunday: Red, Weekdays:  
Black, Saturday: Blue)  
Alarm  
Alarm: Off, Alarm Tone: Pattern 1, Alarm Volume: Level 3, Vibration: Pattern 1, Repeat: 260-261  
Everyday, Snooze: Off  
Dictionary  
Calculator  
Converter  
262  
Set Tax Rate: 5%  
Exchange rate: 0  
263  
264  
Voice Recorder Save sound to: Phone Memory  
265-266  
267  
Countdown  
Timer  
Notepad  
268  
Number Memo  
World Clock  
Backup  
269  
DST on/off: DSToff  
270  
271-272  
78-94  
Phonebook  
My Details: Owner phone number only, Speed Calling: Unset, Default Storage: Phone  
Memory, Scroll Speed: Fast, Phonebook Lock: Off, Search Mode: List View  
Appendix  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
Default Setting  
Page  
Mode  
Settings  
Normal  
(Default)  
Ringtone Volume: Level 3, Assign Ringtone: Pattern 1, Ringtone Duration: 5 sec,  
Vibration: Off, Keypad Volume: Level 3, Keypad Tones: Original 1, Sound Effects Vol.  
(Start Up: Level 2, Shut Down: Level 2, Phone Open: Silent, Phone Closed: Silent, Error:  
Level 2), Sound Effects: Preset Pattern, Multimedia Volume: Level 3, Battery Alarm: On  
209-216  
Silent  
Car  
Vibration: On, Alarm: Off  
Ringtone Volume: Level 5, Assign Ringtone: Pattern 1, Ringtone Duration: 5 sec,  
Vibration: Off, Keypad Volume: Level 3, Keypad Tones: Original 1, Sound Effects Vol.  
(Start Up: Level 3, Shut Down: Level 3, Phone Open: Silent, Phone Closed: Silent, Error:  
Level 3), Sound Effects: Preset Pattern, Multimedia Volume: Level 5, Battery Alarm: On  
Meeting  
Ringtone Volume: Silent, Assign Ringtone: Pattern 1, Ringtone Duration: 5 sec,  
Vibration: Off, Keypad Volume: Silent, Keypad Tones: Original 1, Sound Effects Vol.:  
Silent, Sound Effects: Preset Pattern, Multimedia Volume: Silent, Battery Alarm: On,  
Alarm: On  
Sound Settings  
Same as for Normal above  
Display  
Main Display  
Wallpaper: Custom Screens, Custom Screens: Black, Clock Type Display: 1-line Digital, 217-218,  
220,  
222-223  
Settings  
Backlight Settings (Brightness: Bright, Lighting Time: 15 sec), Operator Name: On,  
Power Saving: 1 min, Cell Information: Off  
External Display Wallpaper & Clock: Normal, Backlight Settings (Lighting Time: 15 sec), Contrast: Level 221-222,  
224  
0
Phone  
Date&Time  
12 hour/24 hour: 24 hour, World Clock (City 1: Tokyo, City 2: Tokyo, Set as Main City: 50, 221  
51-52  
Settings  
City 1, DST on/off: Off)  
Automatic  
49  
言語選択  
Appendix  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
Shortcuts  
Settings  
Default Setting  
Side Up Key: Profile Switch, Navigation Keys ( : Shortcut Menu,  
Page  
Phone  
: Phonebook, 225-226  
aB  
aA  
: Dialled Numbers,  
: Received Calls)  
aC  
D
Words List  
Unset  
77  
External Light  
Notification (Missed Calls: Red, Messages: Blue, Voice Mail: Green), Incoming (Voice  
Call: Purple, Video Call: Purple, Messaging: Aqua)  
227-228  
Offline Mode  
AV Output  
Off  
229  
NTSC  
198-199  
230-231  
Call Settings Answerphone  
Voice Call  
Setting: Off, Ringing Duration: 6 sec  
Caller Details (Incoming Picture: Preset Picture, Caller Picture: On, Caller Info: On),  
Auto Answer: Off, Mute: Off, Earphone Call: Off, Call Priority: Enable, International Call  
(International Code: 0046010), Prefix Settings (Auto Prefix: Off, Hide to Missed Call: Off)  
219,  
230-237  
Video Call  
Outgoing Video: No Picture, Image Quality: Standard Mode, Caller Details (Incoming  
Picture: Preset Picture, Caller Picture: On, Caller Info: On), Zoom: Normal (×1), Auto  
Answer: Off, Mute: Off, Loud Speaker: On, Backlight: On, Hold Guidance: Preset Picture  
113-115,  
219, 232  
Common  
Settings  
Earpiece Volume: Level 3, Speaker Volume: Level 3, Open to Answer: Off, Any Key  
Answer: Off  
238-239  
Media Player Set  
Priority Setting: Incoming Call, Backlight: Always On  
102  
Security  
Settings  
PIN1 Code  
Request  
240-241  
Change PIN1  
Change PIN2  
Appendix  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
Default Setting  
Page  
Security  
Settings  
Change  
Password  
241  
242  
Phone Lock  
Reject Calls  
Phone Closed: Off, Power Saving: Off, Power On: Off  
Hidden: Off, Public Phone: Off, Unavailable: Off, Unknown: Off, Select Contact: Off (Unset) 243-244  
Reject  
Off (Unset)  
245  
Addresses  
Secret Mode  
Off  
246  
Fixed Dialling  
No.  
Off (Unset)  
246-247  
Memory  
Settings  
Phone Memory  
Memory Card  
249  
202-203  
46-48  
Network Settings  
Select Network (Select Network: Automatic), System Mode: UMTS Only  
Connectivity Bluetooth™  
Switch On/Off: Off, Paired Devices (Trust Device: Off), My Phone ID (Visibility: Show My 281-287  
Phone, My Phone: Vodafone/705T, Handsfree Setting: Handsfree Mode)  
USB  
Confirmation: Display, Battery Charge: On  
288-293  
253  
Location Settings  
URL Settings: http: //mobile.its-mo.com/MapToLink/p2, Location On/Off: On  
Optional  
Services  
Call Diverting  
Voicemail  
65-66  
63-64  
69-70  
71  
Call Waiting  
Multiparty Call  
Call Barring  
67-68  
Appendix  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
Default Setting  
Page  
Call Log  
Dialled  
Numbers  
59  
60  
Missed Calls  
Received Calls  
Call Timers  
Call Costs  
Last Call Time: 000:00:00, All Calls Time: 000:00:00  
Last Call: 0Yen, All Calls: , Cost Unit (Unit: , Rate: ),Call Cost Display: Off  
Last Data: 0Kbytes, All Data: 0Kbytes  
61-62  
62  
Data Counter  
Prediction: On, Input Method: Standard, Font Size: Large, Line Feed: On, Keys to  
Convert: 4 Direction Keys, Clipboard: Unset  
72-77  
Text Entry (Japanese Entry)  
Multi Task  
273  
254  
248  
Shortcut Menu  
Thumbnail View, Unset  
Unset  
Press and  
Hold Setting  
Silent  
*
hold  
R
Press and  
hold  
Unset  
209  
#
*This operation is for when your handset is closed.  
Appendix  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Causes and Remedies  
Is the battery pack inserted properly (page 42)?  
Cannot turn the power on.  
Is the battery charged (pages 35, 37, 43)?  
Cannot charge the battery.  
Is there dust on the connections and contacts of the rapid charger, handset or battery  
pack? Clean the connections and contacts with a dry cotton swab, etc.  
Cannot operate the handset normally  
after turning it on.  
Does the PIN1 Entry window appear? PIN1 Code Request (page 240) is set to On. Enter  
your PIN1 code.  
Does the indicator or “Phone Lock” appear on the display? The phone lock (page 242)  
is activated. Enter your security code.  
Does “Please insert valid USIM card.” appear on the display? The USIM card was not read  
properly. Turn the power off and make sure the USIM card is inserted properly.  
Cannot establish a connection for voice  
and video calls or use mail and Web  
functions.  
Does the indicator appear on the display? Are you out of the service area or in a  
location where a signal cannot reach your handset? Move to a location where a signal can  
reach your handset.  
Does the indicator appear on the display? Are you using the handset overseas? To use  
the handset overseas, you need to change the Select Network and System Mode settings  
(page 48).  
Is your hand or another object covering the internal antenna part (pages 31, 32) of your  
handset?  
Does the indicator or “Offline Mode” appear on the display? Cancel offline mode (page  
229).  
Cannot make voice and video calls.  
Did you dial the whole phone number starting from the area code?  
Is Fixed Dialling Numbers (page 246) set?  
Is Call Barring (page 67) set?  
Appendix  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Possible Causes and Remedies  
Is Reject Calls (page 243) set?  
Cannot receive voice and video calls.  
Is Voicemail (page 63) or Call Diverting (page 65) set to All Calls?  
Is Call Barring (page 67) set?  
Cannot send messages.  
Is Fixed Dialling Numbers (page 246) set?  
Is Call Barring (page 67) set?  
Cannot receive messages.  
Is Reject Addresses (page 245) set?  
Is Call Barring (page 67) set?  
Calls are interrupted or disconnected.  
Does the indicator appear on the display? Are you out of the service area or in a  
location where a signal cannot reach your handset? Move to a location where a signal can  
reach your handset.  
Is your hand or another object covering the internal antenna part (pages 31, 32) of your  
handset?  
The handset does not respond to key  
presses.  
Does the indicator or “Phone Lock” appear on the display? The phone lock (page 242)  
is activated. Enter your security code.  
Was your handset closed and the indicator displayed on the external display? The hold  
is activated (page 248). Press and hold R while your handset is closed.  
Appendix  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage Capacity  
Data Folder  
Data Folder  
Up to 40 MB*  
*The V-appli Library shares its memory with Data Folder.  
Mail  
Mailbox*  
Received Msgs.  
Up to 7 MB  
Up to 1,000 SMS messages  
Up to 600 MMS messages  
Sent Messages  
Up to 500 SMS messages  
Up to 150 MMS messages  
Combination of Drafts, Unsent  
Messages and Templates  
Up to 100 SMS messages  
Up to 50 MMS messages  
*Received Msgs., Sent Messages, Drafts, Unsent Messages and Templates of Mailbox share the same memory.  
Web  
Cache  
Up to 600 KB  
Bookmarks  
History (URL)  
Up to 200 bookmarks  
Up to 300 URLs  
Appendix  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Specifications  
705T  
the service area or where it is difficult to receive a signal (in a  
building, vehicle, bag, etc.), this time may be reduced to half or  
less. This time may also be affected by other factors such as the  
operating environment (battery state, temperature, etc.). The value  
for continuous standby time is when the system mode was set to  
UMTS Only.  
The operating time of the battery was calculated when a stable  
signal was received constantly. However, this time may be reduced  
to half or less if the handset is used in a location where the signal  
is weak or the handset is left in standby mode when it is outside  
the service area.  
Repeated charging and discharging a battery shortens the  
operating time. If the operating time becomes too short, purchase  
a new battery pack.  
If the mobile light is used frequently for taking pictures and  
recording videos or as a flashlight, the continuous talk time and  
continuous standby time become shorter.  
When a V-appli is activated, the continuous talk time and  
continuous standby time become significantly shorter.  
If the handset is used with the main display and external display  
illuminated frequently (for Vodafone live! use, etc.), the continuous  
talk time and continuous standby time become shorter.  
Note that the LCD display may have defective pixels (dead or stuck  
pixels).  
Frequency Range : 3G/UMTS 2100 1920-2170 MHz  
: GSM 900  
: DCS 1800  
: PCS 1900  
880-960 MHz  
1710-1880 MHz  
1850-1990 MHz  
Continuous Talk Time : Within 3G/UMTS area  
: Video call  
Approx. 170 min.  
Approx. 90 min.  
Approx. 300 min.  
: Within GSM area  
Continuous Standby Time : Within 3G/UMTS area Approx. 370 hrs.  
: Within GSM area Approx. 250 hrs.  
Charging Time : Approx. 140 min.  
Dimensions when closed (W×H×D) : Approx.47×98×23 mm  
(excluding the camera)  
Maximum Output : 3G/UMTS 2100 Class 3 0.25 W  
: GSM 900  
: DCS 1800  
: PCS 1900  
Class 4  
Class 1  
Class 1  
2 W  
1 W  
1 W  
Weight : Approx. 121 g (when the battery pack is attached)  
The values above were calculated with the battery pack attached.  
The continuous talk time refers to the average length of time  
a signal can be received normally when the handset is in a  
stationary state and a new fully charged battery pack is attached.  
The continuous standby time refers to the average length of  
time a signal can be received normally when the handset is  
closed, the handset is in a stationary state, a new fully charged  
battery pack is attached and there are no calls made/received  
or operations performed. If the handset is in a location outside  
Rapid Charger  
Input Voltage : 100 to 240 V AC  
: 50/60 Hz  
°
Charging Temperature Range : 5 to 35 C  
Appendix  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Term  
Definition  
3G/UMTS  
GSM  
A third generation (3G) mobile communication system. UMTS is the 3G mobile communication system of Europe.  
A wireless system for digital handsets. GSM is the predominant system in Europe and Asia, and is the world  
s most  
widely used system.  
GPRS  
A data transmission technique used for GSM mobile phone networks. It enables the high-speed transfer of data in the  
form of packets.  
USIM Card  
Use the handset with this card inserted. The card stores subscriber information such as your phone number and handset  
data. You can also save Contacts list entries and other data to the card. When you replace your handset, use of the same  
USIM card in the new handset enables you to continue using the data stored on the card.  
USIM PIN  
A number required for using the USIM card with your handset. This number allows you to prevent others from using your  
handset in the event that your handset is lost or stolen.  
MMS  
SMS  
A service that allows long text messages with picture, video and melody attachments to be exchanged.  
A service that allows short text messages to be exchanged between handsets.  
WAP Push  
Message  
The latest information sent automatically as a WAP Push message (server initiated rather than user requested) when you  
have registered with an auto delivery service.  
SSL  
A communication method for transmitting data in an encrypted form over the Internet. It enables data such as  
information related to privacy and credit card numbers to be sent and received safely and protects against dangers on  
the Internet such as eavesdropping, tampering and spoofing. SSL communication uses server certificates.  
Appendix  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Term  
Server  
Certificate  
Definition  
A digital certificate for identifying that a site on a server is trustworthy. The server certificate includes information  
necessary for SSL communication (encrypted communication), server information and a digital signature of a Certificate  
Authority to verify that the server is authentic.  
Cache  
The location in the handset for temporarily storing the data of displayed Web pages, etc.  
V-appli  
Applications including games and 3D images that can be downloaded from the Web pages of V-appli providers. Some  
applications connect to the network to obtain information in real time and some applications can be activated as  
wallpaper.  
Appendix  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Battery 42  
Centre Access Code 54  
Certification 179  
Changing the Name of a Registered  
Bluetooth™ Compatible Device 283  
Changing the Name of Your Handset  
(Bluetooth™) 285  
Changing Your Mail Address 146  
Charging the Battery Pack 43, 293  
Checking Appointments 258  
Clock Display 220  
Numeric  
3D Pictogram Display 164  
Battery Alarm 215  
Beat Engine Box 96  
Bluetooth™ 281  
Bookmarks 174, 175  
Browser Settings 179  
A
accessories 2  
Adding a New Appointment 256  
Alarm Tone 216  
Alarms 260  
C
Calculator 263  
Calendar 256  
Call  
Answerphone  
Playing a Message 231  
Recording 56  
Setting 230  
Answering a Call 56  
Answering a Video Call 108  
Making a Call 55  
12-hour and 24-hour Clock 221  
External Display 221  
Main Display 220  
Any Key Answer 239  
Assign to Contact (Camera) 131, 132  
Authentication PIN Code 281  
Auto Answer 114, 231  
Auto Launch 179  
Making a Video Call 107  
Placing a Call on Hold 56, 57, 109  
Call Barring Service 67  
Call Barring Service Code 54  
Call Cost 61  
Call Diverting Service 65  
Call Log 59  
Call Sender 166  
Call Time 60  
Call Waiting Service 69  
Caller ID 237  
Camera Modes 117, 123  
Cell Information 223  
Codes 54  
Call Barring Service Code 54  
Centre Access Code 54  
Security Code 54  
Colour Control 141  
Confirming the memory status 78, 94,  
120, 193, 249  
Contacts List 78  
Contrast 224  
Converter 264  
Copy Text 167, 168  
Copying Contacts List Entries 206  
Copying Entries from the USIM Card 206  
B
Background Playback 99  
Backlight (Media Player) 102  
Backlight (V-appli) 184  
Backlight (Video Call) 115  
Backlights (Display) 222  
Backup (Memory Card) 271  
Backup (USB Cable) 292  
Barcode 274  
Appendix  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Entries to the USIM Card 206  
Countdown Timer 267  
Creating & Sending Message (MMS) 148  
Creating & Sending Message (SMS) 159  
Creating a vObject 201  
Effects 142  
Emergency Calls 41  
Enter URL 172  
Exposure Control 122, 133, 142  
External Device 252  
External Light 227  
Incoming 228  
I
Image Quality (Video Call) 112  
Importing a vObject 201  
Incoming Display 219  
Incoming External Light 82, 83, 228  
Incoming Voice Calls during Data  
Communication 234  
Indicators  
Custom Screens 218  
Customer Service 315  
Notification 227  
D
Data Folder 193  
Extract 166, 168  
Camera 118  
Date & Time 50  
Date Stamp 137  
Daylight Saving Time 52  
Delay Timer 140  
External Display 36  
Information Prompt 38  
Main Display 34  
F
File Name (Camera) 143  
File Playback Time 152  
File Select Mode 177  
MMS 153, 155  
Deleting a Registered Bluetooth™  
Compatible Devices 283  
Details of Your Handset (Bluetooth™) 284  
Dialled Numbers 59  
Dial-up Connections (Bluetooth™) 287  
Dial-up Connections (USB Cable) 292  
Dictionary 262  
Files Storable in Data Folder 194  
Fixed Dialling Numbers 246  
Flashlight 277  
Formatting a Memory Card 202  
Forward 156, 166, 168  
Frame Setting 124  
SMS 161, 162  
Video Call 106  
Information Prompt 38  
Initialising Your Handset 249  
International Call Service 235  
Internet Settings 251  
Function List 295  
K
L
Displaying a Grid 137  
Keypad Shortcuts (Camera) 143  
G
H
Displaying Details (Bluetooth™) 283, 284  
Displaying Files on a TV 198  
Downloading 178, 182, 190, 195  
Drafts 169  
General Notes 19  
Glossary 306  
Language Setting 49  
Load 167  
Location Property 179  
Handsfree 286, 287  
History 191  
Hold 248  
E
M
Earpiece Volume 58, 238  
Editing Picture 126  
Editing Text 74  
Macro Lens 139  
Mail List 156  
Main Menu 53  
Hold Guidance (Video Call) 115  
Appendix  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manage Folder 166  
Managing Appointments 259  
Media Player 96  
Media Player Settings 102  
Melody&Music 193  
Memory Card 44, 202  
Memory Manager 179  
Missed Calls 59  
MMS 148  
MMS Settings 157  
MMS/SMS Common Operations 164  
Mobile Light (Camera) 140  
Mode Settings 209  
Music Player 103  
Picture Quality (Camera) 136  
Picture Size (Camera) 122, 126  
PIN Codes 40, 240  
PIN1/PIN2 40, 240  
Play 166, 168  
Play Modes 99  
Playlist 100  
Power On/Off 45  
Power Saving 223  
Preview Setting 142  
PUK Codes 40, 241  
PUK1/PUK2 40, 241  
Music Transfer Mode 289, 291  
Music Transfer Mode Confirmation  
Window 291  
Mute 57, 71, 110, 197, 232  
My Favourites 101  
N
O
P
Navigation Key 6, 226  
Network  
Application Settings 250  
Select Network 46  
Night Mode 123  
Notepad 268  
Q
R
Car 209  
Meeting 209  
Normal 209  
Personalising Profiles 210  
Silent 209  
Number Memo 269  
QR Code 274  
Offline Mode 229  
Received Calls 59  
One-touch Answering 234  
One-touch Calling 233  
Open to Answer 239  
Operator Name Display 222  
Outgoing Video (Video Call) 113  
Owner Information 94  
Received Messages (MMS) 153  
Received Messages (SMS) 161  
Receiving Complete MMS Messages 154  
Receiving Data (Bluetooth™) 286  
Receiving Data (USB Cable) 292  
Receiving Settings (MMS) 157  
Recipient List 150, 160  
Record Modes 117, 135  
Recording a Message with the  
Answerphone 56  
Move to USIM/Phone 167, 168  
Moving Contacts List Entries 204  
Moving Entries from the USIM Card 205  
Moving Entries to the USIM Card 204  
Moving Messages from the USIM Card 207  
Moving Messages to the USIM Card 207  
Moving SMS Messages 207  
Multi Shots 124  
Parts & Functions 31  
Password 68, 241  
Phone Lock 242  
Multi Task 273  
Multiparty Call Service 71  
Music File Information 290  
Phonebook 78  
Phonebook Lock 93  
Pictographs (Text Entry) 73  
Recording Other Party's Voice 58  
Recording Sound 265  
Recording Sound (Camera) 135  
Appendix  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Videos 132  
Registering a Bluetooth™ Enabled  
Device 282  
Sending Settings (MMS) 158  
Sent Messages (MMS) 155  
Sent Messages (SMS) 162  
Server Mail Box 156  
Setting Handsfree 287  
Setting the Phone Number 233  
Shortcut Keys  
Navigation Key 226  
Side Up Key 225  
Shortcut Menu 254  
Shutter Sound 137  
Template (SMS) 160  
Text Entry Modes 72  
abc/Abc/ABC 72  
Rejecting Incoming Calls 56, 243  
Rejecting Messages 245  
Reply 166  
Reset Settings 90, 184  
Response to Detection by Other  
Bluetooth™ Compatible Devices 284  
Restoring Data (Memory Card) 272  
Restoring Data (USB Cable) 292  
Retrieve 166  
English Entry (T9) 72  
Japanese Entry 72  
Numeric 72  
Symbols 72  
T9 abc/T9 Abc/T9 ABC 72  
Touch Tones 278  
Trademarks and Patents 25  
Transferring data (Bluetooth™) 281  
Transferring data (USB Cable) 288  
Transferring Music Files 290  
Trust Device (Bluetooth™) 282  
TV 198, 199  
SMS 159  
SMS Settings 163  
Snooze 261  
Soft Keys 6  
Retrieve MMS 154  
Retrieving Network Information 252  
Ringtone 82, 211  
Ringtone Volume 82, 210  
Speaker Volume 109, 238  
Specifications 305  
Speed Calling 88  
Start & End Sounds 139  
Stereo Handsfree Headset 232  
Storage Capacity 304  
Storage Place (Camera) 140  
Switch Screens (Video Call) 111  
Switching between the Earpiece &  
Speaker 58, 110  
U
V
Unsent Messages 170  
USB 288  
S
Safety Precautions 7  
Save as Template 167, 168  
Save Sender 166  
Screen Settings (Camera) 138  
Screen Settings (Video Call) 111, 112  
Screensaver 183  
USIM Card 39, 204  
V-appli 180  
Download 182  
Managing 185  
Security Settings 185  
Settings 184  
Secret Mode 246  
Security Code 54, 241  
Send (Camera) 122, 133  
Sending a Picture (Video Call) 112  
Sending Data (Bluetooth™) 285  
Sending Data (USB Cable) 291  
System Mode 46  
Starting 183  
Vibration 82, 83, 184, 212, 260  
Video Encode 135  
Video Quality 138  
T
Taking Pictures 121  
Template (MMS) 151  
Appendix  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Size 133  
vObjects 200  
Vodafone live! 172  
Vodafone live! CAST 187  
Voicemail 63  
Voice Recorder 265  
During a Call 58  
Playing Recordings 266  
Recording Sound 265  
W
Wallpaper 217  
WAP Push Messages 161  
Warranty & After Sales Service 313  
White Balance 141  
World Clock 270  
Setting 51  
Viewer 270  
Z
zoom (Camera) 122, 133  
Zoom (Video Call) 110  
Appendix  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty & After Sales Service  
Warranty  
A warranty card is included with the handset. Carefully read the card and check that the store  
name and purchase date sections have been filled in correctly. Then, store it in a safe place.  
Note  
Vodafone and Toshiba assumes  
no responsibility for damages to  
you or third parties as a result  
of a failure, malfunction or faulty  
operation of the product.  
Appendix  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After Sales Service  
Be sure to refer to Troubleshooting (page 302) before submitting your handset for repair.  
If you are still having problems with your handset, contact your nearest Vodafone Shop or  
Vodafone General Information (page 315).  
Note  
• Data and settings may be lost  
or altered as a result of failure  
or repair of your handset. It is,  
therefore, recommended that  
you keep a backup copy of  
important data such as Contacts  
list data. Vodafone and Toshiba  
assumes no responsibility for  
any damages due to the loss  
or alteration of handset data  
(contents of the Contacts list,  
Data Folder, etc.) and settings  
as a result of failure or repair of  
your handset.  
Repair within warranty period  
Repair is carried out in accordance with the conditions of the warranty.  
Repair after warranty period  
Repair is carried out if possible and the handset owner is responsible for any repair costs.  
During repair, parts may be replaced with used parts that meet our quality standards.  
• Disassembling or modifying the  
handset is in violation of Radio  
Law. Your handset will not be  
accepted for repairs if it has  
been modified.  
Tip  
If you have any inquiries with  
regards to the after sales service,  
contact your nearest Vodafone  
Shop or Vodafone General  
Information (page 315).  
Appendix  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Service  
If you have any questions about a Vodafone handset or service, please call General Information. For service or handset repairs, please call  
Customer Assistance.  
Vodafone International Call Centre  
Vodafone Customer Centres  
From outside Japan, dial  
From a Vodafone handset, dial toll free at 157 for General  
+81-3-5351-3491 (Please take care to dial the correct  
Information or 113 for Customer Assistance.  
number. International charges will apply to this call.)  
Call These Numbers Toll Free from Fixed Line Phones  
General Information  
Customer Assistance  
General Information  
Customer Assistance  
General Information  
Customer Assistance  
General Information  
Customer Assistance  
General Information  
Customer Assistance  
General Information  
Customer Assistance  
0088-240-157  
0088-240-113  
0088-241-157  
0088-241-113  
0088-242-157  
0088-242-113  
0088-259-157  
0088-259-113  
0088-247-157  
0088-247-113  
0088-250-157  
0088-250-113  
Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi, Fukushima, Niigata, Tokyo, Kanagawa,  
Chiba, Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi, Gunma, Yamanashi, Nagano, Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui  
Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka  
Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama  
Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane  
Tokushima, Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi  
Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita, Kumamoto, Miyazaki, Kagoshima, Okinawa  
Appendix  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Toshiba Camcorder D R3 User Manual
Toshiba Cordless Telephone DKT2404 DECT User Manual
Toshiba Laptop 5100 9 User Manual
Toshiba Oxygen Equipment LF620F User Manual
Toshiba Power Supply 55611 001 User Manual
TP Link Network Card TL WN620G User Manual
TRENDnet Network Router TEW712BR User Manual
Tripp Lite Power Supply SURBC2030 User Manual
Ultimate Support Systems Saw CUSTOM 1 User Manual
VDO Dayton Car Video System DV 6100 User Manual